JP2019154697A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-101428

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I )),
In the effective period of detection by the detecting means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), etc.) Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means includes
Plural kinds of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the several aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion effect in jackpot game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion history display in waiting for a customer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of overwrite update of a setting suggestion history display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a some setting suggestion history display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the overwrite update of several setting suggestion history display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting suggestion history display for every category. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone production | presentation determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach kind determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit suggestion effect determination table, an accessory effect determination table, and a light-guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of prefetch zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of prefetch zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect during reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect during reach. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit | end effect process (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing production stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing production stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a post-hit suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command process at the time of power-on which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the alerting | reporting which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the time of start concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output change process in progress which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control in the modification which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of initial operation which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command process at the time of power-on in the modification concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation alerting | reporting screen which concerns on characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production | presentation control pattern which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram illustrating a control example of confirmation effects relating to the characteristic portion 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change which concerns on characteristic part 75AK. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram illustrating a control example of confirmation effects relating to the characteristic portion 75AK. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output mode of a setting change corresponding | compatible signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of a setting change response signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) A diagram showing values displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, (2) a diagram showing values displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value, (3) FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Further, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern in the pachinko game machine 1 of this Embodiment, and the kind of reach. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the display pattern of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , Etc., are prepared, such as fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability when each reach is executed (normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super). Reach B <super reach A in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a superreach level one level higher, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to reach a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, as shown in FIG. The Super Reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP Reach A” characters) is displayed on the entire screen, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name (here “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the enemy character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach A that are confronted are executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. (In this case, the characters “SP reach B”) and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach B”) are output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is Informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the enemy character 31AK006 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The succeeding part of the reach production of Super Reach B that confronts is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 8-2 (I), the contents of the effects common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but the super reach effects dedicated to super reach D are executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, “SP reach E”) of super reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). (H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the degree of expectation indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by a meter or gauge. A numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decision effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  8-2 and 8-3, while the reach effect of super reach, the decorative design is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 and variable display is executed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may make it display. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the expectation suggestion display 31AK008, but first, five white stars are displayed, In other words, the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars on the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation suggestion when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the title notification and the expected degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). You may make it vary the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion production | generation). Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) of the super reach C is displayed. The title of Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, whereby the Super Reach A title. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of Super Reach titles changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern" A changing thing, a thing changing from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and this order (ascending order) ) Is a big hit reliability. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may vary depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and FIGS. 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 that is an ally character and a character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed in the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and a small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. An effect 31AK050 in which a bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is in the central portion. And a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived at the timing when the variation time ends. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effects shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, a reach state is obtained as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 121IW)
Next, the characteristic part 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 includes a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window between a door open position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened centering on the left side and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the store clerk can use the gaming machine frame 121IW003 and glass. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 has a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate), which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 that functions as a setting switch and a clear switch 121IW050 for initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (performing initialization processing) are provided.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, is housed in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are accommodated. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

  Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature part 121IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by a single key.

  The substrate case 121IW201 is provided with a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized in the board case 121IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in this feature 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 from the back side is attached. This security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. The security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a via the front end of the short piece 121IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab contacts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 121IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 cannot be operated by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 to move from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW is regulated such that the operation to the operation part including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated by the security cover 121IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 unless a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A fraudulent member such as a wire or a cell board is entered from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may cause an illegal act of changing the setting value, so that the setting key 121IW051 is changed over to the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500A when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Restricted state in which operation on operation unit including switch 121IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the feature part 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal figure display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit variation determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). 9), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like shown in FIG. 9-6 are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature 121IW, the winning probability for small hits is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, a case where the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration indicated by the feature 121IW may be applied.

  In this feature 121IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the case where the advantage becomes higher in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown. For example, the priority ranking according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit is likely to occur with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball is easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature 121IW, a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is comprised so that it may be used, a different table may be provided and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined may be different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5 (B). In the feature section 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the production control board 12 side, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for informing the start of the round is executed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process in step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the big hit type A, then the longest in the case of the big hit type B, and the longest in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined as the big hit type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  This feature 121IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggest a set value during the big hit game, but this big hit suggestion effect is used for the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  Also, in this feature 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, in any case of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a special number of times (100 times in this feature part 121IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. This feature 121IW is configured such that the ratio of winning big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  Also, in this feature part 121IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence / absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 121IW exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  In addition, in this feature 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type. However, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In this feature 121IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in this feature part 121IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Moreover, in this feature part 121IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in this feature part 121IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of opening of the big winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. .

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 121IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real-time clock or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  Each of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) is a normal reach loss or a super reach loss in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, except for non-reach loss, depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature 121IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the entire super reach lose differ according to the set values, and according to the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  The feature 121IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature part 121IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is different from the normal pattern and the set value is 1 or 2 May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach losing variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach losing, it is further determined as one of non-reach losing A to C. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 includes non-reach loses A to C, and any of non-reach loses A to C, normal reach loses, and super reach loses. You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach lose C (change time of 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting value is “1”, since the ratio that is determined to be non-reach loss C is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The feature 121IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by changing the ratio of non-reach loses A to C with different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the display time of the decorative symbols, such as shaking display of high-speed variation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the feature unit 121IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a fixed decorative design (final decoration pattern (final) is used. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, this feature 121IW is configured so that the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C is determined for each set value, thereby winning the big hit When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (the winning rate) of the jackpot is higher.

  In this feature 121IW, a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. For this reason, in this feature 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW will be described. FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. In this feature 121IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is made, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the production control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and checks whether the value of the production control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the processes of steps 121IWS004 to S005 are repeated. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 121IWS006 is executed after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to start up, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and recovery processing, etc. are executed. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, clears a factory default setting flag indicating that the factory default setting is stored in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). In step 121IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the setting value remains unchanged from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 121IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not the value at the time of shipment from the factory remains the same. If the factory default setting is maintained (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 121IWS007). Specifically, in step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. (Step 121IWS008). In step 121IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping power supply. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 121IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 1 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is off (N in Step 121IWS011), the setting key 121IW051 is off (N in Step 121IWS012), or the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is off. In (N of Step 121IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without proceeding to Step 121IWS014.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014 is executed, in this feature unit 121IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 121IWS007 and S008), or when the setting at the time of factory shipment is left (step 121IWS006 Y), if a power interruption occurs during setting change (step 121IWS009Y), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch 121IW050 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. On the condition that the RAM is cleared, the set value after step 121IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is released and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch 121IW050 are turned on, the loop process is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is on (step 121IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that setting confirmation processing is to be started to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

  Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the presentation control board 12 may be configured such that when a presentation operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed, “maintenance mode” or the like is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” refers to, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change In this mode, the recording of the setting value can be confirmed. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS016) or the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 121IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production | presentation control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production | presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch 121IW050 is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating the start of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). In addition, CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). In addition, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  In this feature 121IW, the processes of steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies a setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting check error process (step 121IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting confirmation error, and executes the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting check error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again and the process is not allowed to proceed.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process.

  Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 9-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029. May update the display on the display monitor 121IW029 to “3”, and if “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 121IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in an open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 121IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating a setting change error, and executes a setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the process does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 121IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (see Y in step 121IWS009, 121IWS014). The error state will be released.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process.

  FIGS. 9-11 is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. In this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch 121IW050 is set. If it is on, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch 121IW050 is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch 121IW050 is on, and the recovery process (step S6) if the clear switch 121IW050 is off. ) Is executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch 121IW050 (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is Setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is ON, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 as described above, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by the store clerk or the like of the game hall. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the CPU 103 ends the display on the display monitor 121IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall. Informs the game shop clerk that the new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-12 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the display on the display monitor 121IW029 (in the same manner as in FIG. 9-12 (A)) Display) is resumed, and a game is possible, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, etc. can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the feature unit 121IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this feature 121IW), or the most advantageous for the player The set value (“3” in the case of this feature 121IW) may be displayed.

  Further, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process is not limited to the display mode illustrated in FIG. 9-12, and may be the display mode illustrated in FIG. 9-13. 9-13 (A)-(D) is the same as FIG. 9-12 (A)-(D), and as shown in FIG. 9-13 (E), the CPU 103 has a setting key 121IW051 as a game hall. The display monitor 121IW029 is blinked on the basis of being turned off by the operation of the store clerk, etc., thereby notifying the store clerk of the game hall that a new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the setting value is displayed using the first display among the four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029 when the setting value is confirmed or changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays “−S−1” in four digits, and if the set value is “2”, “−S-2” is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 may display “−S-3” as a 4-digit display if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “1111”, and if the setting value is “2”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “2222”. May be.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 121IW will be described. FIGS. 9-14 and 9-15 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the combined reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 121IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 121IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step 121IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in this feature 121IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 121IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). As already described, in the feature unit 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 121IWS031, but even after the power is turned on, the step When the variable display is started by executing the process of 121IWS 108, a set value command is transmitted.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, a variation pattern command corresponding to the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) is required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 121IWS031) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 121IWS108) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, a set value command for power-on and a set value command for start of variation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted when the power is turned on and when change starts. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which set value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. You may comprise so that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio may differ. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 121IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 9-4) with the random value MR1, and determines that the big hit or small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 121IWS111). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in Step 121IWS111), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step 121IWS116.

  When the value of the random value MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5) to specify a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“jacket type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 121 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

  Next, the effects according to the first embodiment and the effects according to the second embodiment will be described as effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the set value can be set as described in the characteristic section 121IW. . In the following description, the feature part of the effect according to the first embodiment is referred to as a feature part 1560S, and the feature part of the effect according to the second embodiment is a feature of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can set the set values described above. Similar to the section, it is referred to as a characteristic section 121IW.

(Description of effects related to feature 1560S)
First, an effect according to the first embodiment (effect related to the feature unit 1560S) executed in the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 capable of setting a set value as described in the feature unit 121IW will be described. In the following description of the characteristic section 1560S, the state where the predetermined effect is “continue” means not only a state where the predetermined effect is being continuously executed, but also storage means for storing information relating to the predetermined effect ( For example, in the RAM 122), a state in which a predetermined effect (or an effect based on information related to the predetermined effect) can be executed (a state in which the information can be continuously executed) by the information related to the predetermined effect not being overwritten and updated, This includes a state where execution of other effects that can be executed at the timing of executing the effect is prohibited (a state where only a predetermined effect is permitted to be executed). More specifically, a state in which a predetermined effect is “continue” is a state in which a predetermined effect (for example, setting suggestion history display described later) is continuously displayed on the effect display device 5 (for example, A state where display is continued for a predetermined period), a state where the display can be displayed again (for example, a state where display is possible by a predetermined operation), and a predetermined effect (for example, described later) in the image display device 5. This includes a state where display of other effects (other setting suggesting effects) is prohibited by displaying the predetermined setting suggesting effects).

(Explanation about setting suggestion effect)
First, the setting suggestion effect that is one of the effects related to the characteristic portion 1560S will be described. The setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment is an effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the element that determines the set value is one of the pleasures for the player. It will be possible to enjoy the game in the long term.

(Setting suggestion effect decision processing)
First, the setting suggestion effect determination process will be described as the operation of the effect control means in the feature 1560S. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of a setting suggestion effect determination process that is a part of the effect control main process in the feature 1560S. In this feature 1560S, in the variable display start setting process (S171) and the big hit effect process (S177) in the effect control main process (specifically, the effect control process process), the execution of the setting suggestion effect and its contents are performed. Setting suggestion effect determination processing for determination is performed.

  In the setting suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect when the ending effect is started in the big hit effect process. In addition, in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 performs the cumulative display of the variable display executed without the big hit game since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or after the big hit game ends. The cumulative number of variable displays that were executed without the next big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “the number of fits”) reached a predetermined number of times (for example, the reciprocal of the big hit probability to about twice the reciprocal; for example, 500 times). Sometimes, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 1560SS01).

  When it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting suggestion effect determination table (step S1560SS02) and determines to execute the setting suggestion effect. If not, the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. In addition, in a present Example, it has a some aspect (A-1 to A-2, B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3) as a production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, and any of these Whether to execute the setting suggestion effect of the aspect is determined based on the determination ratio according to the setting value defined in the setting suggestion effect determination table. A plurality of effect forms of setting suggestion effects and a setting suggestion effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3.

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control updates (or does not update) the setting suggestion history information based on the priority order associated with each effect mode of the setting suggestion effect (1560SS03), and ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. To do. Here, the setting suggestion history information is information indicating the execution history of the setting suggestion effect, and is information that is updated and stored in the RAM 122 according to a predetermined rule. In this embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode executed this time (determined in step S1560SS02) is stored as setting suggestion history information, and the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode performed in the past is prioritized. If it is higher than the rank, the setting suggestion effect information of the effect mode executed this time is overwritten and updated as setting suggestion history information (otherwise, it is not updated). The details of the priority order associated with each setting suggestion effect mode and the details of the setting suggestion history information overwrite update will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10-2 and 10-8.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as a predetermined timing according to the history of the game played by the player (game history), a situation favorable for the player (ending effect during the big hit game) and a situation undesirable for the player The setting suggestion effect is executed in any of the situations (when the number of fittings reaches a predetermined number). That is, regardless of whether or not the situation is favorable for the player, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the game history by proceeding with the game, which contributes to the motivation for the player to continue the game. Can improve the interest of

  In the above description, the number of fits is the cumulative execution count of variable display that does not depend on the player, but may be the cumulative execution count of variable display that does not depend on the player. That is, it is possible to indicate the number of times one player gets stuck by resetting the number of times each time a player is changed. Note that any method may be used for determining that the player has been changed. For example, it may be determined that the player has been changed when the display of the customer waiting screen (menu screen or customer waiting demo screen) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). Further, it may be determined that the player has been changed when the period during which the operation of the hitting operation handle is not detected continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). Further, it may be determined that the player has been changed when the game end information is input by the player (for example, when a password is issued upon completion of the game from the menu screen). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with a face authentication sensor, and it may be determined that the player has been changed by the face authentication sensor. Alternatively, the player himself / herself may be able to reset the number of fits (for example, a reset operation can be performed from a menu screen).

(Other examples where the setting suggestion effect is executed)
Further, the predetermined timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is not limited to the above example. For example, the timing to be executed in a situation that is preferable for a player is when the total number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) acquired during the retreat exceeds a certain number (for example, 5000 balls) or one round Advantageous when the number of wins in the game in the game exceeds a specified number (for example, 9), or when a game ball passes through a specific area (so-called V win) It may be when a V prize is won in a gaming machine (so-called V-like gaming machine or two-type gaming machine) controlled to (probable change state or big hit gaming state). In addition, as a timing to be executed in a situation unfavorable for the player, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the probability variation latency state, when it is controlled to the probability variation latency state again after a big hit in the probability variation latency state (so-called latent loop) ) And a certain breakthrough condition (for example, a big hit during a certain number of shorts) will be in an advantageous state (for example, the number of short breaks will increase or the game will be controlled in a probable state) In a machine (a so-called breakthrough type gaming machine), when a breakthrough could not be achieved, or when a high-expected performance (for example, a reach production exceeding a predetermined expectation) was executed, the game was lost, or a V prize could not be awarded It may be when. In addition, as other timing, even if the game ball is launched in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time (so-called in the morning) after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started when the hall starts business. Alternatively, it may be a timing at which a player performs a predetermined button operation (for example, an operation for selecting execution of a setting suggestion effect) on the customer waiting screen, or a timing at which a predetermined pre-reading effect is executed. May be.

(Multiple effects of setting suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-2, a plurality of effect modes of the setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of systems (A system to C system) in the production mode of the setting suggestion effect, and each system has a plurality of production modes, and different contents are suggested depending on the system. FIG. 10-2 (1) shows the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect of the A system, FIG. 10-2 (2) shows the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect of the B system, and FIG. The production mode of setting suggestion production of C system is shown.

(Setting system effect suggestion effect of A system)
The setting suggestion effect of the A system effect mode is displayed with an icon of a shape ◯, and suggests whether the set value is an even value (“2”) or an odd value (“1” or “3”) It is a production to do. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect A-1 of the effect mode of the A system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the shape ◯ is hatched, and suggests that the setting value is an even value. The setting suggestion effect A-2 of the A system effect mode is an icon of the display mode in which the inside of the icon having the shape ◯ is black, and suggests that the set value is an odd value. Production.

(Setting suggestion effect of the production mode of B system)
The setting suggestion effect of the production mode of the B system is displayed with an icon of □, and whether the setting value is advantageous (high setting) or disadvantageous (low setting) for the player This is an effect that suggests the level of the setting. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect B-1 of the effect mode of the B system is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the shape □ is outlined, and is an effect suggesting that the setting is low. The setting suggestion effect B-2 of the production mode of the B system is an icon of a display mode in which the shape of the □ icon is hatched, and is an effect suggesting that the setting is the middle setting, The setting suggestion effect B-3 of the effect mode is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the shape □ is painted black, and is an effect suggesting that it is a high setting.

(Setting suggestion effect of C system effect mode)
The setting suggestion effect of the C system effect mode is an effect that is indicated by an icon having a shape of Δ and suggests an expectation that is a specific set value (“3” in this example). Specifically, the setting suggestion effect C-1 of the C system effect mode is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon having a shape of Δ is white, and the expectation level that is a specific set value is low. The setting suggestion effect C-2 of the C system effect mode is an icon of a display mode in which a hatched line is added to the inside of the icon of Δ, and the expectation degree is a specific set value. Is an effect that suggests that it is moderate, and the setting suggestion effect C-3 of the C system effect mode is an icon of a display mode in which the inside of the icon of the triangle is black, and has a specific setting This is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation is high.

  As described above, in this embodiment, setting suggestion effects of a plurality of types of effect modes are classified into a plurality of systems, and the setting suggestion effect of the system is suggested by the shape of the icon of the setting suggestion effect. . And the system of the suggestion content which suggests a setting value changes with systems of a setting suggestion production. That is, the A system indicates whether the set value is an even number or an odd number, the B system indicates the level of the set value, and the C system indicates an expectation that is a specific set value. In this way, since the system of suggestion contents that suggest the setting value differs depending on which of the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of types of effect modes is executed, the player can analyze the setting value from various angles. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above, it is assumed that the system of the setting suggestion effect is suggested by the shape of the icon of the setting suggestion effect, and different contents in each system are suggested by the difference in the display mode (black painting etc.) . However, the system of setting suggestion effects and the suggested content in each system only need to be distinguishable, and are not limited to those suggested by such an aspect. For example, it is assumed that a setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying a character with a finger raised, and a system of setting suggestion effects is suggested depending on the type of character, and there are different contents in each system depending on the number of fingers raised by the character. It may be suggested. Further, the system of setting suggestion effects is not limited to the above-described three systems, and may be two or four or more. Similarly, there may be four or more types of setting suggestion effects in each system.

(Priority)
As shown in FIG. 10-2, the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of types of effect modes are associated with respective priorities for each effect mode. Here, the priority order is information that is referred to when setting suggestion history information to be described later is overwritten and updated, and the priority order is higher than the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode performed in the past stored as the setting suggestion history information. When a setting suggestion effect of an effect mode with a high (small priority number) is executed, the setting suggestion effect information is overwritten and updated to the setting suggestion history information. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2, when the priority order is arranged in descending order (in descending order of priority number), setting suggestion effects C-3, B-3, C-2, The order is B-2, A-2, A-1, C-1, and B-1.

  By the way, the setting suggestion effect C-3 suggests that the degree of expectation that is a specific set value (set value 3) is high, so the suggestion content is advantageous to the player, and the setting suggestion effect B-3. However, since it suggests that the setting is high, the suggested content is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the setting suggestion effect C-1 suggests that the degree of expectation that is a specific setting value (setting value 3) is low, so the suggestion content is disadvantageous for the player, and the setting suggestion effect B-1 However, the suggested content is disadvantageous for the player because it suggests that the setting is low. As described above, in this embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect (C-3, B-3) of the effect mode in which the suggestion content is advantageous for the player is set high, and the suggestion content is disadvantageous for the player. The priority of the setting suggestion effects (C-1, B-1) of the effect mode is set low. For example, the setting suggestion effect A-2 suggests that the setting value is an odd value, but the setting value is “1” (low setting) or “3” (high setting). I do n’t know. As described above, since the setting suggestion effect A-2 cannot be generally determined whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player, its priority is set to medium ("5").

  From the above, when the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode with a high priority is executed, the setting suggestion content advantageous to the player is set by overwriting and updating the setting suggestion effect information to the setting suggestion history information. The suggestion effect information is held as the setting suggestion history information. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed based on the setting suggestion history information, so that the suggestion contents advantageous to the player can be continuously displayed as the setting suggestion history display, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to continue the game.

  As described with reference to FIG. 10-2, the setting suggestion effects A-1 and A-2 are effects in which the setting values indicate even values and odd values, respectively, and the setting suggestion effects B-1 , B-2, and B-3 are effects suggesting a low setting, a medium setting, and a high setting, respectively, and the setting suggesting effects C-1, C-2, and C-3 are respectively specified set values “ 3 ”is an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is low, medium and high. In this way, the setting suggestion effects of each effect mode indicate different contents because each setting suggestion effect is determined based on the setting suggestion effect determination table at a different ratio according to the actually set value. By. The setting suggestion effect determination table will be described below.

(Setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 10C illustrates a setting suggestion effect determination table that is referred to when determining the setting suggestion effect of each effect mode according to the set value that has been set. As shown in FIG. 10C, when the set value is “1”, setting suggestion effects B-1, C-1, A-2, B-2, C-2 are arranged in descending order of the determination ratio. , B-3, C-3. When the set value is “2”, the setting suggesting effects B-2, C-2, A-1, B-3, C-3, C-1, B- are arranged in descending order of the determination ratio. The order is 1. When the set value is “3”, the setting suggestion effects C-3, B-3, C-2, B-2, A-2, C-1, B- are arranged in descending order of determination ratio. The order is 1.

  Therefore, when the setting suggestion effects B-1 and C-1 are executed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is “1” (however, the setting value may be “2” or “3”). . Therefore, the setting suggestion effect B-1 functions as an effect suggesting a low setting, and the setting suggestion effect C-1 functions as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation of the specific set value “3” is low. . On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect C-3 or B-3 is executed, the setting value is likely to be “3” (however, the setting value may be “1” or “2”). . For this reason, the setting suggestion effect C-3 functions as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation of the specific set value “3” is high, and the setting suggestion effect B-3 functions as an effect suggesting a high setting. . Further, when the setting suggestion effect B-2 or C-2 is executed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is “2” (however, the setting value may be “1” or “3”). . Therefore, the setting suggestion effect B-2 functions as an effect suggesting the medium setting, and the setting suggestion effect C-2 is an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation of the specific set value “3” is medium. Function as.

  When the setting value is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect A-1 is not determined, whereas when the setting value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect A-2 is not determined. Thereby, setting suggestion effect A-1 functions as an effect which suggests that a setting value is an even number, and setting suggestion effect A-2 functions as an effect which suggests that a setting value is an odd value. In this embodiment, since the set value can be set to “1” to “3”, when it is suggested that the set value is an odd value, the set value is “1”, On the other hand, if it is suggested that the set value is an even value while not knowing which of the values is “3”, it is suggested that the set value is “2”. For this reason, even when the setting value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect A-2 may be selectable, and the setting value may not necessarily be definitely suggested to be “2”. . Alternatively, if the setting value range can be set to “1” to “4” and the setting value is suggested to be an even value, the setting value is “2” or “4”. You may make it not understand which is.

  In addition, each determination ratio in the setting suggestion effect determination table illustrated in FIG. 10-3 is merely an example, and may be appropriately changed within a range in which the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect of each effect mode is not changed.

(Explanation on setting suggestion history display)
Next, the setting suggestion history display, which is one of the effects related to the characteristic portion 1560S, will be described. The setting suggestion history display in the present embodiment is a display showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect. Since the element for determining the set value is one of the enjoyment for the player, the setting suggestion effect is also one of the fun for the player. However, since this setting suggestion effect is not known when it is executed, some players may miss it. For this reason, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion history display, which is the execution history of the setting suggestion effect, can be displayed. It is possible to confirm the setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed by displaying a past ending screen (screen displayed during the ending effect) in the customer waiting state (waiting for customers). Specifically, as described above, since the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending effect as described above, one of the setting suggestion effects of the plurality of effect modes shown in FIG. 10-2 is displayed on the ending screen. Is displayed. For this reason, when the ending screen at this time is displayed again as the past ending screen, the setting suggestion effect displayed in the past ending screen is also displayed again. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect in the past ending screen displayed again functions as a setting suggestion history display indicating the execution history of the setting suggestion effect executed in the past. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10-8, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display indicates the execution history of the setting suggestion effects executed in the past, but is not necessarily executed the latest. It does not indicate a setting suggestion effect.

(Variable display start waiting process)
Next, a variable display start waiting process will be described as the operation of the effect control means in the feature 1560S. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display start waiting process that is a part of the effect control main process in the characteristic section 1560S.

  In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 1560SS11).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end display of the customer waiting screen (menu screen or customer waiting demonstration screen) (step 1560SS16). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 1560SS17), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” (step 1560SS18), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to start the setting suggestion history display (step 1560SS12). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs player button operation (for example, push button 31B) when a predetermined menu screen (see FIG. 10-7 (1) described later) is displayed in the customer waiting state. When a determination operation is performed on a predetermined selection item (ending screen history item shown in FIG. 10-7 (1) to be described later) by the above operation, it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is started.

  When it is determined that the setting suggestion history display is to be started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the setting suggestion history display based on the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 (step S1560SS13). For example, when the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information, a display indicating that the setting suggestion effect B-2 has been executed as the setting suggestion history display on the past ending screen. (For example, as in the setting suggestion effect B-2, an icon having a display form in which an oblique line is added to the icon of the shape □ is displayed).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to end the setting suggestion history display (step 1560SS14). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines to end the setting suggestion history display when a predetermined operation for ending the setting suggestion history display (for example, a determination operation for the selection item “return”) is performed ( 1560SS14).

  When it is determined to end the setting suggestion history display or when it is not determined to start the setting suggestion history display, the effect control CPU 120 displays a predetermined customer waiting screen (a menu screen or a customer waiting demo screen). Display (step S1560SS13), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated. When it is not determined to end the setting suggestion history display, the effect control CPU 120 repeats the process of step 1560 SS14 until it is determined to end the setting suggestion history display.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the setting suggestion history display that is the execution history of the setting suggestion effect is performed by the player's operation while waiting for the customer, even if the player misses the setting suggestion effect, It is possible to confirm setting suggestion effects executed in the past by the user's own operation. In addition, for example, since the execution history of the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed while waiting for a customer even in a vacant stand, it can be helpful in determining whether or not to play a game based on this execution history. Game motivation can be increased.

(Other examples of setting suggestion history display)
Note that the condition for starting the setting suggestion history display (display of the past customer waiting screen) is not limited to the above example. For example, the setting suggestion history automatically (regardless of the player's operation) after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the customer waiting state is started (or after the customer waiting demonstration effect is started) The display may be started. Similarly, the condition for terminating the setting suggestion history display is not limited to the above-described example. For example, the setting suggestion history display may be automatically terminated when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) elapses after the setting suggestion history display is started. Further, the setting suggestion history display is not executed in the customer waiting state, but may be executed during variable display or a big hit game. As an example executed during variable display, for example, it may be arbitrarily displayed by an operation of a player during variable display. As an example executed during the big hit game, the setting suggestion history display may be executed by redisplaying the past ending screen at the opening during the big hit game. Similarly to the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion history display may be executed at various timings in a situation preferable for the player or at various timings in a situation undesirable for the player.

(Display of setting suggestion history information at power-on)
Next, the setting suggestion history display accompanying the start (ON) / stop (OFF) of the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  Since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 is displayed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (when turned off). Cleared. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (turned on), the setting suggestion history information is not stored in the RAM 122. For this reason, on the production control board 12 side, even if power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (for example, even if a command at the time of restoration is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process), setting suggestion history information There is no effect based on (for example, setting suggestion history display).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the RAM 122 is not backed up, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the setting suggestion history information stored in the past is retained. Therefore, the production based on the past setting suggestion history information is not executed. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a RAM 122 that is backed up.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the RAM 122 that is backed up by the power source, the setting suggestion history information stored in the RAM 122 is also retained when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (turned off). (Backed up). Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (turned on), the setting suggestion history information is stored in the RAM 122. For this reason, on the production control board 12 side, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (for example, when a recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process), the setting suggestion history information Based on this, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting a set value (for example, a setting suggestion history display). For this reason, it becomes possible to suggest a setting value based on the execution history of the setting suggestion effect performed on the previous day, for example. As described above, the setting value is suggested when the power supply is started, so that it is possible to increase the player's gaming motivation.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the power-backed-up RAM 122, the effect based on the backed-up setting suggestion history information is executed without changing the setting value and without performing the RAM clearing process. It may be only when it is started (that is, when recovery processing is performed). That is, when the setting value is changed or the RAM clear process is performed, even if the setting suggestion history information is backed up, an effect that suggests the setting value based on the setting suggestion history information is not performed. It may be a thing.

  Note that when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, an effect suggesting the set value may be executed based on the current set value. For example, at the start of hall operation, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started first (so-called in the morning), and a predetermined value indicating the current set value is determined by a lottery according to the currently set value. An effect may be executed. In this way, by suggesting the set value in the morning, it is suggested that there is a possibility that the vacant base is a good base, so that it is possible to increase the player's gaming motivation. Further, when the setting value has been changed from the previous day, a predetermined effect suggesting the current setting value may not be executed in the morning. In other words, only when the setting value of the previous day has not been changed, a predetermined effect that suggests the current setting value may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an excessive sense of expectation that the set value has been changed.

(Example of rendering operation of feature 1560S)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 10-5 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect executed during variable display, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect executed during a big hit game (ending effect). Shows an example of a setting suggestion history display executed while waiting for a customer.

(Setting suggesting effect during variable display)
During variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (1), for example, the variable display at the 499th fit is completed (finished by losing), and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (2), When the variable display that has reached the predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) is started, a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect 1560S10) is executed in the upper right part of the effect display device 5. Specifically, for example, when the current set value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect C-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 22%, for example, based on the setting suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. By doing so, as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10, an icon having a display mode in which a diagonal line is added to the inside of the icon having the shape Δ is displayed.

  Note that the timing at which the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 is displayed is not limited to the start timing of variable display, and may be a predetermined timing during variable display or an end timing of variable display.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation that is not preferable for the player during the variable display (when the number of fits reaches a predetermined number of times). Even if this is not preferable, it is possible to cause the player to expect the situation to improve in the future, which can contribute to the motivation for the player to continue the game.

(Setting suggestion during big hit game)
During the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), for example, the round game of the final round (for example, 16R) is finished, and as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), an ending effect is provided. When started, a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect 1560S10) is executed in the upper right part of the effect display device 5 (upper right part of the ending screen). Specifically, for example, when the current set value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect C-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 22%, for example, based on the setting suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. By doing so, an icon of a display mode in which a diagonal line is added to the inside of the icon of Δ as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 is displayed.

  Note that the timing at which the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 is displayed is not limited to the start timing of the ending effect, but may be a predetermined timing during the ending effect.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation preferable for the player as in the big hit game, the current preferable situation is not due to the setting value suggested by the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to expect the heel player to contribute to the motivation for the player to continue the game. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is assumed to be executed in all ending effects. However, the setting suggestion effect is set only in the ending effect based on a specific jackpot (for example, the jackpot having the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of jackpots). The suggestion effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the feeling of rarity with respect to the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(Setting suggestion history display)
In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), a predetermined menu screen is displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31 </ b> B). In this menu screen, a plurality of selection items that can be selected by the player are displayed, and when the player determines any of the selection items, a screen corresponding to the determined selection item is displayed. The plurality of selection items include an ending screen history item as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1). When this item is determined, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2). The past ending screen is displayed. As described above, the setting suggestion history display (setting suggestion history display 1560S20) is displayed in the past ending screen. Specifically, for example, when the setting suggestion effect C-2 is stored as setting suggestion history information in the RAM 112 based on the execution of the setting suggestion effect C-2, the setting suggestion history display As 1560S20, an icon of a display mode (similar to the setting suggestion effect C-2) is displayed with an oblique line inside the icon of Δ as shown to indicate that the setting suggestion effect C-2 has been executed. Is done.

  In this way, in this embodiment, since the setting suggestion history display is performed by displaying the ending screen history (past ending screen) while waiting for a customer, even if the setting suggestion effect is missed, it is executed in the past. The execution history of the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed, and it can be used to help determine whether or not to continue the game.

  In FIG. 10-7 (2), as the ending screen history (past ending screen), the ending screen (actually acquired total number of medals) and the ending screen actually displayed in the past including the number of consecutive villas ( That is, it is assumed that the ending screen itself shown in FIG. However, it is sufficient for the ending screen history to display the setting suggestion effect in the ending screen that functions as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20, and other effects such as the appearance of a ball may be omitted as appropriate.

  In this embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed by displaying the past ending screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a history display screen for displaying the execution history of the setting suggestion effects executed so far may be provided separately, and the history display screen may be displayed by an operation of a player waiting for a customer.

  In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is performed while waiting for a customer. However, a setting suggestion effect may be executed while waiting for a customer. Specifically, based on the player's operation, an effect that draws a fortune is executed, and a set value “1” is expected if the fortune is “Daikichi”, and a set value “2” if the fortune is “Nakakichi”. ”And a setting suggestion effect such that a setting value“ 3 ”is expected when the fortune is“ Kokichi ”may be executed. In this way, by configuring so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for a customer, game characteristics can be provided even while the customer is waiting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Setting suggestion history display during variable display)
In this embodiment, the setting suggestion history display is executed while waiting for a customer. However, the setting suggestion history display is not limited to this, and may be performed during variable display. Specifically, during execution of variable display, ON / OFF of the setting suggestion history display may be switched by a predetermined switching operation of the player (for example, switching operation by the push button 31B). By doing in this way, the player can check the setting suggestion history display even during the game, so that it can help determine whether or not to continue the game while playing the game.

  As described above, when the setting suggestion history display can be executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion history display is switched to ON, thereby hindering the visibility of the effect based on the variable display. You may not be able to focus on For this reason, during variable display, there are a condition for enabling the setting suggestion history display to be turned on (hereinafter referred to as a permission condition) and a condition for restricting the setting suggestion history display from being turned on (hereinafter referred to as a restriction condition). It is preferable that it is set. As the permission condition, a condition when it is not necessary to pay attention to the effect based on the variable display may be set. Specifically, as permission conditions, the variable display being executed is a variable display of a loss that does not include reach, the period before the reach effect is executed, or the pre-read effect is not executed And so on. In addition, as a limiting condition, a condition when it is necessary to pay attention to an effect based on variable display may be set. Specifically, as a limiting condition, a specific reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) is being executed, a hold change effect is being executed, or a pre-reading continuous notice effect is executed. The operation period of the movable accessory (movable effect device), the execution period of the effect (operation effect) accompanied by the player's operation, and the like. Thus, by setting the permission condition and the prohibition condition, the setting suggestion history display can be executed during the variable display, and the visibility of the effect based on the variable display to be noticed can be ensured.

(Update of setting suggestion history information)
Next, overwriting update of setting suggestion history information will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion history information is updated based on the priority order (see FIG. 10-2) associated with each setting suggestion effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a big hit is made for the first time after the start of power supply, and a setting suggestion effect B of priority “4” is set as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game -2 is executed. Then, since nothing is stored as setting suggestion history information, information on the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information. If the RAM 112 is backed up by power, whether or not it is overwritten and updated based on the priority order of the setting suggestion effect and the priority order of the setting suggestion effect B-2 stored as backup setting suggestion history information. May be determined.

  Thus, when the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the setting suggestion history information, the ending screen is displayed in the waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed. When the history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20, an oblique line is displayed inside the icon of the shape □ so that the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed. The attached display mode icon (the same mode as the setting suggestion effect B-2) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second big hit is performed, and the priority order is set to “7” as the setting suggesting effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggestion effect C-1 is executed. Then, since the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the priority “4” of the setting suggestion effect B-2 and the priority of the setting suggestion effect C-1 executed this time Since the rank “7” is compared and the priority order of the setting suggestion effect C-1 executed this time is lower, the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated.

  As described above, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 is not updated as the setting suggestion history information, and the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 remains stored in the RAM 112. For this reason, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect C-1 is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 is displayed. As shown, the display in the same manner as the setting suggestion effect B-2 is continued so as to indicate that the setting suggestion effect B-2 has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (3), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the third big hit is performed, and the priority is set to “3” as the setting suggesting effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggestion effect C-2 is executed. Then, since the setting suggestion effect B-2 information is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the priority “4” of the setting suggestion effect B-2 and the priority of the setting suggestion effect C-2 executed this time The order “3” is compared, and the setting suggestion effect C-2 executed this time has a higher priority, so the setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated.

  Thus, when the information of the setting suggestion effect C-2 is overwritten and updated as the setting suggestion history information in the RAM 112, the ending in the waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect C-2 is executed is performed. When the screen history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 is displayed as a diagonal line inside the icon of the shape Δ to indicate that the setting suggestion effect C-2 has been executed. The icon of the display mode to which is attached (the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2) is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority order of the setting suggestion effect of the executed effect mode is
The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated when the priority order of the setting suggestion effects of the effect mode performed in the past stored as the setting suggestion history information is higher. For this reason, the setting suggestion history information is updated to the information of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode having a high priority, and therefore the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode having a high priority is executed as the setting suggestion history display. The history will be displayed. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode having a high priority order is advantageous for the player because the suggestion content is advantageous to the player, so that the suggestion content advantageous to the player can be continuously displayed as the setting suggestion history display. (It is not updated to the content that is disadvantageous to the player), and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to continue the game.

(Modified example of overwrite update)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion history information overwrite update is performed according to the priority order defined for each setting suggestion effect presentation mode (more specifically, the advantage of the suggested content of the setting suggestion effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting suggestion history information may be overwritten and updated on the executed setting suggestion effect information every time the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the priority order. If it does in this way, the setting suggestion history display performed based on setting suggestion history information will show the execution history of the setting suggestion effect performed most recently.

(Other examples of priority)
Further, in this embodiment, the priority of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode whose suggestion content is advantageous for the player is high, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a thing with high priority of the setting suggestion production | presentation of the production | presentation aspect with high possibility of suggesting an actual setting value. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10C, for example, when the setting value is “1”, the setting suggestion effect B-1 may indicate the actual setting value “1”. Since it is the highest, when the setting value is “1”, the priority order of the setting suggestion effect B-1 is set to “1”. When the setting value is “2”, the setting suggestion effect B-2 is most likely to suggest the actual setting value “2”. The priority order of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is “1”. When the setting value is “3”, the setting suggestion effect C-3 is most likely to suggest the actual setting value “3”. The priority order of the setting suggestion effect C-3 is “1”. In this way, when the priority order of the setting suggestion effect of each effect mode is set according to the actual setting value, the setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated based on the priority order, so that the actual setting value is changed. Suggestion contents that are highly likely to be suggested can be continuously displayed as the setting suggestion history display, and the accuracy of estimating the set value can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the execution history of one setting suggestion effect executed in the past is updated and stored as the setting suggestion history information. However, the execution history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects is updated and stored. It is also possible that display indicating the execution history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects may be performed as the setting suggestion history display. Below, with reference to FIG. 10-9 and FIG. 10-10, the example which can update-store the execution log | history of the setting suggestion effect of 3 times as setting suggestion history information is demonstrated.

(Multiple setting suggestion history display)
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a big hit is made for the first time after the start of power supply, and a setting suggestion effect B of priority “4” is set as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. -2 is executed. Then, since nothing is stored as the setting suggestion history information, the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information.

  Thus, when the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information, the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed is described. When the ending screen history is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 having three display frames (left frame, middle frame, right frame) is set in the right frame. A mode similar to the setting suggestion effect B-2 is displayed to indicate that the suggestion effect B-2 has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second big hit is performed, and the priority order is set to “7” as the setting suggesting effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggestion effect C-1 is executed. Then, information on the setting suggestion effect C-1 is stored in the RAM 112 as second setting suggestion history information.

  Thus, after the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the first setting suggestion history information, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 is stored in the RAM 112 as the second setting suggestion history information. Is done. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect C-1 is executed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B). As the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided, the same mode as the setting suggestion effect B-2 displayed in the right frame is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and the setting suggestion effect C-1 is newly executed in the right frame. As shown, the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the third big hit is performed, and the priority is set to “3” as the setting suggesting effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. It is assumed that the suggestion effect C-2 is executed. Then, the information of the setting suggestion effect C-2 is stored in the RAM 112 as the third setting suggestion history information.

  Thus, after the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 and the information of the setting suggestion effect C-1 are stored in the RAM 112 as the first and second setting suggestion history information, the setting suggestion effect C-2 is stored. Is stored in the RAM 112 as third setting suggestion history information. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect C-2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), three display frames are displayed. As the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided, the same aspects as the setting suggestion effects B-2 and C-1 displayed in the middle frame and the right frame are moved and displayed in the left frame and the middle frame, respectively. A mode similar to the setting suggestion effect C-2 is displayed so as to indicate that the setting suggestion effect C-2 has been newly executed.

  As described above, when setting execution history information can be updated and stored as setting suggestion history information, a plurality of setting suggestion effects are displayed as setting suggestion history display 1560S20. In order to show that the execution has been executed, a display showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effects is performed a plurality of times so that the execution history is updated from left to right.

(Update multiple setting suggestion history information)
Next, overwriting update of setting suggestion history information when the setting suggestion effect is executed exceeding the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect that can be stored as setting suggestion history information (three times in this example) will be described. FIGS. 10-10 (1a) and (A) show an example of overwriting and updating based on the priority order of setting suggestion effects, and FIGS. 10-10 (1b) and (B) show the setting suggestion effects being executed. An example of overwriting and updating each time is shown. 10-10 (1a) and (1b) are effects performed after FIG. 10-9 (3).

  First, an example of overwriting and updating based on the priority order of setting suggestion effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (1a), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fourth big hit is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A with priority “6” is set as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. -1 is executed. At this time, since the setting suggestion effects B-2, C-1, and C-2 are stored as the setting suggestion history information, the priority order “4”, “7”, “ 3 ”is compared with the priority“ 6 ”of the setting suggestion effect A-1 executed this time. As a result, as setting history information, information on the setting suggestion effect C-1 (priority “7”) lower than the priority order “6” of the current setting suggestion effect A-1 is the information on the setting suggestion effect A-1. Overwritten and updated. In addition, among the plurality of setting suggestion effects stored as the setting suggestion history information, when there are a plurality of setting suggestion effects lower than the priority order of the current setting suggestion effect, the one with the lower priority order is the current setting What is necessary is just to overwrite and update the information of suggestion production. Further, when all of the plurality of setting suggestion effects stored as the setting suggestion history information are higher than the priority order of the current setting suggestion effects, the setting suggestion history information may not be overwritten and updated.

  As described above, the setting suggestion effect A-1 is overwritten and updated in the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information, so that the setting suggestion effect B-2, C-2, A- 1 information is stored. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect A-1 is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), three display frames are displayed. As the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided, the same aspect as the setting suggestion effect C-1 with low priority displayed in the middle frame is deleted, and the same as the setting suggestion effect C-2 displayed in the right frame The aspect is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and the same aspect as the setting suggestion effect A-1 is displayed in the right frame so as to indicate that the setting suggestion effect A-1 is newly executed.

  As described above, when a plurality of setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated based on the priority order, the priority order of the setting suggestion effect of the executed effect mode is stored in the past as the setting suggestion history information. The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated when it is higher than any of the priority orders of the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of effect modes. Also, as the setting suggestion history display, the display showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect that has been overwritten and updated (erased) is erased, and then the display showing the execution history of the other setting suggestion effects is displayed left justified. Is done. For this reason, the execution order of the setting suggestion effects is also suggested by the display position of the execution history of the plurality of setting suggestion effects displayed as the setting suggestion history display. In addition, the display showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect of this time is displayed as it is at the display position showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect that has been overwritten and updated (erased) without being displayed left-justified as described above. It is good also as what is.

  Next, an example of overwriting and updating each time a setting suggestion effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (1b), in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fourth big hit is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A with priority “6” is set as the setting suggestion effect 1560S10 in the ending effect during the big hit game. -1 is executed. At this time, as setting suggestion history information, information of setting suggestion effects B-2, C-1, and C-2 is stored, but the information of the setting suggestion effect B-2 stored the oldest is deleted, Instead, information on the setting suggestion effect A-1 executed this time is newly stored.

  As described above, the setting suggestion effect A-1 is overwritten and updated in the RAM 112 as setting suggestion history information, so that the setting suggestion effect C-1, C-2, A- 1 information is stored. At this time, when the ending screen history is displayed in the customer waiting state after the end of the ending effect in which the setting suggestion effect A-1 is executed, three display frames are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B). As the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 provided, the oldest stored setting suggestion effect B-2 displayed in the left frame is deleted, and the same manner as the setting suggestion effect C-1 displayed in the middle frame Is moved and displayed in the left frame, the same mode as the setting suggestion effect C-2 displayed in the right frame is moved and displayed in the middle frame, and the setting suggestion effect A-1 is newly realized in the right frame. As shown, a mode similar to the setting suggestion effect A-1 is displayed.

  As described above, when a plurality of setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated every time the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion history display executed based on the setting suggestion history information is the three most recently executed. This indicates the execution history of the setting suggestion effect.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect information executed in the ending effect is stored as the setting suggestion history information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the information of the setting suggestion effect executed in the ending effect, the information of the setting suggestion effect executed during the variable display and the information of the setting suggestion effect executed in other situations (for example, waiting for customers) Alternatively, it may be stored as setting suggestion history information. As described above, when setting suggestion history information is stored in various different situations (ending, variable display, waiting for customers), the setting suggestion history information is stored for each situation. As the history display, a display showing the execution history of the setting suggestion effect may be performed for each situation. A specific example will be described below with reference to FIGS.

(Setting suggestion history display for each category)
In FIG. 10-11, setting suggestion effects are executed in three different situations (hereinafter referred to as categories), such as an ending effect, variable display, and other situations (for example, waiting for customers), and set for each category. An example is shown in which suggestion history information is stored and setting suggestion history display is performed for each category.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the setting suggestion history display is performed in each of a plurality of categories, for example, as one of a plurality of selection items on a predetermined menu screen in a customer waiting state, When an item of suggestion history is included and this item is determined, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), a “today's suggestion history” screen for displaying the setting suggestion history for each category is displayed. . And on the `` Today's suggestion history screen '', each execution history of setting suggestion effect performed during ending, setting suggestion effect performed during variable display, and setting suggestion effect performed in other situations, respectively, The setting suggestion history display 1560S20 is displayed so as to be distinguishable.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 10-11, as the setting suggestion history display 1560S20, an execution history of the setting suggestion effect during the ending indicates that the setting suggestion effect A-2 has been executed (inside the icon of the shape ◯) Is displayed in black), and the execution history of the setting suggestion effect during variable display indicates that the setting suggestion effect C-1 has been executed (the inside of the icon of the shape Δ is The display of the setting suggestion effect in other situations is displayed in the form of a white display icon), and the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed (a hatched line is added to the icon of the shape □) Icon).

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the setting suggestion effect B-1 is executed during the ending and the setting suggestion effect A-1 is executed during the variable display. Then, for each category, the priority order of the setting suggestion effect performed in the past stored as the setting suggestion history information is compared with the priority order of the current setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion history information in the category is overwritten and updated. Specifically, during the ending, the priority order “8” of the current setting suggestion effect B-1 is lower than the priority order “5” of the setting suggestion effect A-2 stored as the setting suggestion history information. Therefore, the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated, and the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 during ending does not change (continues). On the other hand, during variable display, the priority “6” of the setting suggestion effect A-1 is higher than the priority “7” of the setting suggestion effect C-1 stored as the setting suggestion history information. The setting suggestion history information is overwritten and updated, and the setting suggestion history display 1560S20 during the variable display is an aspect indicating that the setting suggestion effect A-1 is executed (a display aspect in which an oblique line is added to the inside of the icon having the shape ◯) Icon).

  Even when the setting suggestion history display is performed in each of a plurality of categories, the setting suggestion history display is executed for each category instead of being overwritten and updated based on the priority order for each category as described above. It may be overwritten and updated every time. In addition, a plurality of setting suggestion history information may be stored for each category, and a plurality of setting suggestion effect execution histories may be displayed for each category.

  Moreover, it is good also as what matches a category and the system | strain of a setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect of the A system is executed during the ending, the setting suggestion effect of the B system is executed during the variable display, and in other situations, the setting suggestion effect of the C system is executed. A setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, this correspondence does not necessarily have to be one-to-one. Moreover, it is good also as what has the system setting suggestion effect performed only in a specific category. For example, the system A setting suggestion effect can be executed during variable display, but may not be executed in other categories.

  Moreover, what kind of category may be mentioned above, for example, a category may be set according to a game state, and a category shall be set according to the performance mode currently performed. Alternatively, a category may be set depending on whether or not a specific performance (for example, a pre-reading performance) is being executed, or depending on a situation that is preferable or unfavorable for the player as described above. A category may be set.

(Modification of feature 1560S)
It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine 1 only needs to have the minimum necessary configuration when performing the effect of the feature unit 1560S, and may not have all the configurations described in the feature unit 121IW. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be any pachinko gaming machine capable of setting at least a set value. For example, the set value is “1” <“2” <“3” as described in the feature section 121IW. The order of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period need not be increased in this order.

  In the above-described embodiment, at the timing when the setting suggestion effect can be executed, any one of the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of effect modes is determined and can be executed. Once the setting suggestion effect B-2) is executed once, until the execution of a specific setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect C-3) is determined, the same setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect B-) 2) may be continued (in other words, execution of other setting suggestion effects is prohibited). In this way, the setting suggestion history display does not change until a specific setting suggestion effect is executed. The specific setting suggestion effect in this case may be a setting suggestion effect that suggests a more advantageous content for the player than the suggested content of the already executed setting suggestion effect. In this way, the setting suggestion effect does not change unless the setting suggestion effect suggesting contents advantageous to the player is executed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive sense of expectation.

  In the above embodiment, at the timing when the setting suggestion effect can be executed, one of the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of effect modes is determined and can be executed, but until a specific timing arrives The setting suggestion effect that is executed once may be continued. That is, for example, when the setting suggestion effect B-2 is executed in the first ending effect, the setting suggestion effect B-2 is continued in the subsequent ending effects until the specific timing arrives (others) The execution of the setting suggestion effect may be prohibited). The specific timing in this case is a rare timing for the player (for example, when the number of consecutive games exceeds 10 times, or when the total number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game exceeds 10,000 balls). There may be. In this way, since the setting suggestion effect changes only at a rare timing for the player, it is possible to give a sense of rarity to the changed setting suggestion effect.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion history display can be displayed at any time by the player's operation in the customer waiting state, but can be displayed as a privilege to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be a thing. Specifically, the setting suggestion history display may be executed as a privilege to the player when the points acquired as the game progresses reach a predetermined value. Further, when a rare effect (for example, a full rotation effect) is executed, the setting suggestion history display may be executed as a privilege to the player. Further, when the number of consecutive resorts reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the setting suggestion history display may be executed as a privilege for the player.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending effect and the variable display. However, instead of the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion history display may be performed. Specifically, at a predetermined timing for executing a setting suggestion effect such as during an ending effect and during variable display, one of a plurality of effect suggestion effects is determined by a predetermined lottery, and the determined setting is determined If the priority order of the suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion history information may be updated, and the setting suggestion history display may be executed based on the updated setting suggestion history information. That is, in the customer waiting state, the setting suggestion history information is not updated, but the setting suggestion history display can be executed. However, the setting suggestion history information can be updated during the ending effect and the variable display. The setting suggestion history display may be executable.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the same setting suggestion effect determination table (see FIG. 10-3) regardless of the situation in which it is executed. The setting suggestion effect determination table to be referred to may be different depending on under what circumstances it is executed. Specifically, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation unfavorable for the player (for example, when the number of times of engagement reaches a predetermined number), the setting suggestion effect of suggestion content advantageous to the player is easily selected. The suggestion effect determination table may be referred to. In this way, even when the player is playing in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for continuing the game. On the other hand, in a situation unfavorable for the player, a setting suggestion effect determination table in which it is difficult to select a setting suggestion effect with suggested contents advantageous to the player may be referred to. By doing in this way, when the player is playing a game in an unfavorable situation, the player can change to another game table with the setting suggestion effect as a trigger. Further, for example, when a setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation preferable for a player (for example, during an ending effect), a setting suggestion effect determination table that is likely to indicate an actual setting value is likely to be selected. May be referred to. By doing in this way, a setting suggestion effect can be functioned as a privilege in a desirable situation.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting suggestion production | presentation shall be able to perform all of several setting suggestion production | presentations irrespective of what kind of situation, it is performed in what kind of situation The setting suggestion effects that can be executed may be different depending on the type. Specifically, when a setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation unfavorable for the player (for example, when the number of times of engagement reaches a predetermined number), the player is only suggested a more implicit setting value. Thus, for example, only the setting suggestion effect of the B system may be executed.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion history display were demonstrated as the display effect in the effect display apparatus 5, it is not restricted to such an effect, For example, a lamp display may be sufficient. Specifically, for example, a lamp display unit is provided in the lower part of the effect display device 5, the color of the lamp display unit suggests a system of setting suggestion effects, and the lighting pattern of the color of the lamp display unit (for example, always display, blinking) Etc.) may suggest different contents in each system. In addition, the lamp display unit can function as a setting suggestion history display by displaying the same as the setting suggestion effect at the timing when the setting suggestion history display is performed. In addition, by providing a plurality of lamp display units, it is possible to function as a setting suggestion history display indicating the execution history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects, or as a setting suggestion history display for each category.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature Unit 1560S)
Regarding the above characteristic portion 1560S, conventionally, for example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (Prior Art 1), in a gaming machine in which a setting value can be changed, the setting value can be changed according to the setting value before and after the change. It is described that a setting value is suggested by displaying either a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion during display. However, in the above-described prior art 1, even if it is possible to suggest a set value, there is a possibility that a display that suggests the set value may be missed, and the interest of the game cannot necessarily be improved. . The gaming machine of means A1 according to the above-described feature 1560S (first embodiment) solves this problem.
According to the gaming machine of means A1,
A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value,
A setting suggestion effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of setting suggestion effects suggesting which setting value is set at a different ratio according to the set value,
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
After performing the first setting suggestion effect for performing the first suggestion, the first setting suggestion effect is continued until the second setting suggestion effect for performing the second suggestion different from the first suggestion is performed. (For example, the setting suggestion history information is not overwritten and updated until the second setting suggestion effect having a higher priority than the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The execution history of the suggestion effect is displayed continuously)
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first setting suggestion effect is continued until the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the player can continuously confirm the suggestion of the set value (first suggestion). , Can improve the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of means A2 is a gaming machine of means A1,
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
As the setting suggestion effect, a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects (for example, A system to C system shown in FIG.
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the system that suggests the setting value differs depending on which of the multiple types of setting suggestion effects is executed, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the setting value from various points of view. Interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A3 is a gaming machine of means A1 or A2,
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing according to the game history (for example, during the ending effect, or a variable display in which the number of fits reaches a predetermined value),
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the game history by advancing the game, which contributes to the motivation for the player to continue the game and can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A4 is any of the gaming machines of means A1 to A3,
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
A setting suggestion history (for example, a setting suggestion history display 1560S20) that is an execution history of the setting suggestion effect can be displayed.
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the execution history of the setting suggestion effect is known, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the setting value from various points based on the setting suggestion effect executed in the past, and to improve the interest of the game. Can do.

The gaming machine of means A5 is any of the gaming machines of means A1 to A4,
Comprising storage means for storing information relating to the setting suggestion effect executed when the power of the gaming machine is shut off;
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
When the gaming machine is turned on, the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the information stored in the storage means.
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the setting value is suggested when the power is turned on, it is possible to increase the player's gaming motivation and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A6 is a gaming machine of means A4,
The setting suggestion effect executing means includes
The content suggested by the newly executed setting suggestion effect is more advantageous to the player than the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect displayed as the setting suggestion history (for example, the priority shown in FIG. 10-2). Is displayed), the execution history of the newly executed setting suggestion effect is overwritten on the setting suggestion history,
The content suggested by the newly executed setting suggestion effect is more disadvantageous for the player than the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect displayed as the setting suggestion history (for example, the priority shown in FIG. 10-2). The execution history of the setting suggestion effect newly executed is not overwritten on the setting suggestion history (for example, see FIG. 10-18),
It was characterized by that.
According to this feature, the suggested content is advantageous (for example, a high setting value is expected), and the setting suggestion effect history is displayed and displayed, so that it is possible to increase the player's gaming motivation (expectation) Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Description of effects related to the characteristic part 121IW)
Next, an effect according to the second embodiment (effect related to the feature part 121IW) executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting a set value as described in the feature part 121IW will be described.

(Direction mode change process)
First, the operation of the effect control means in this feature 121IW will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. In this feature part 121IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control random number update process in step S77, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 121IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In this feature part 121IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process in step 121IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date / time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 121IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag may be set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

(Command analysis processing)

  FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 121). 121IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 121IWS306).

  In this feature 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. The Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where no set value is stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is executed. A configuration value command may be transmitted whenever the power is turned on.

  In this feature 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting changing process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to a command missing or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 reads the set value command, You may comprise so that it may be determined whether the setting value contained is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the newly received set value command is used. It may be configured to determine that a mismatch has occurred and to determine that there is an abnormality when the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 121IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature part 121IW, when the presentation control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, the setting change process end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process. In the image display device 5, control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variation display is started). Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance production).

  If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial appearance determination table is used to determine whether the combination of an even number of initial designs (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even numbers of decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative designs. A certain odd initial appearance (for example, “135”, “113”, etc.) and a special initial appearance that is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) are determined (step 121 IWS 309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 121IWS309, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), lottery processing based on random numbers is performed in accordance with allocation of determination values according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the ratio determined to the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) to determine the initial output (step 121IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS310 to S311 is executed, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined as the special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  FIG. 11-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the initial outcome determination table for the effect mode C, the odd initial outcome is determined as compared with the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial appearance determined in steps 121IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 121IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance as an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5. , The control for displaying the even initial number is performed (step 121IWS315).

  When the processing of step 121IWS315 is executed, the feature unit 121IW uniformly displays the even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode B. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial appearance symbols is set lower overall than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial outcome is uniformly displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 121IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is one of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 The initial appearance is determined to be the even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even initial appearance (step 121IWS317). In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be the even initial appearance and is not determined to be the odd initial appearance. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 121IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 121IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, and outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. Or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or LED emits light with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full color LED It is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command formed in the RAM. Store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit or whether to make a big hit, a big hit type or a small hit type) (step 121IWS323), for the production control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command for designating the display of a decorative symbol stop symbol) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( Step 121 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

  The received effect control command designates whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit pre-determined by the symbol designation command (start winning determination process (see step S101)), and whether the big hit type or the small hit type is determined (Step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first available storage area in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS331). Step 121 IWS 332).

  If the received effect control command is a variation category command (an effect control command for designating a determination result of a variation category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) determined in advance by the start winning determination process (see step S101)) (step 121IWS333). ), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 121IWS 334).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received first reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. The storage area is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step 121IWS 336). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS338).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received second reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step 121IWS 340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS341). Further, the production control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS342).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the first reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the first hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS345).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS 346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the second hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS347). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS348).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS301.

  The feature 121IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed at the time of power-on, but may be configured to display the odd initial number. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, , A design suggestion effect during a game that is executed during a decorative pattern change display), a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and a jackpot suggestive effect that is executed during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game) Has been. In this feature part 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. You may make it the reliability of suggestion differ for every. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Pre-reading notice setting process)
In addition, in this feature 121IW, in addition to the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect, the pre-read zone effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the effect stage as an effect that can suggest the set value It is possible to produce effects by changing the above.

  FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart illustrating the prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a command for starting a winning prize is newly received (step 121IWS401). Specifically, a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) are stored in the command storage area at the time of winning a prize. This can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command for starting winning a set is newly received, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a new starting prize for the first starting prize opening has occurred (step 121IWS402). . Note that whether or not the start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, specifically, whether or not the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not. If the start winning to the first start winning opening has not occurred (that is, if the starting winning to the second start winning opening has occurred), the process is ended as it is.

  If a start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is 2 or more (step 121IWS403). If the first reserved memory number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved memory number is 1), the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this example, the processes of steps IWS402 and S403 are executed, so that the prefetch zone effect may be executed only when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed twice or more. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-read zone effect can be executed, or the pre-read zone effect is executed even when only one change display is executed after the start winning prize. It may be possible to configure.

  If the first reserved storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a pre-read zone effect execution flag indicating that the pre-read zone effect is being executed is set (step 121IWS404). If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is set (that is, if the pre-read zone effect is already being executed), the processing is ended as it is. By executing the process of step 121IWS404, in this example, when the prefetch zone effect is already being executed, the prefetch zone effect is not determined redundantly.

  If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the pre-read zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 first of the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All symbol designating commands (all symbol designating commands stored in association with the first reserved storage number addition designating command) based on winning at the start winning award are extracted (step 121IWS405).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not any of the extracted symbol designation commands indicates that the prefetch determination result is a big hit (step 121IWS406). If there is a jackpot (that is, if there is a jackpot in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the look-ahead zone for jackpot as a table for determining the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect. An effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS407). If there is no big hit (that is, if there is no big hit in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the prefetch zone for losing as a table for determining the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect. An effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected prefetch zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect (step 121IWS409).

  FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the prefetch zone effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a specific example of the pre-fetch zone effect determination table for jackpot. Moreover, FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect determination table for loss. As shown in FIG. 11-7, in this example, when there is a big hit in the first reserved memory, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 70%, If there is no big hit among them, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 1%.

  In this example, the case where the execution ratio of the pre-read zone effect is changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution ratio of the prefetch zone effect may be varied according to the presence / absence and type of super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the prefetch zone effect may be varied in accordance with the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations and the number of pseudo-continuations.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetch zone effect (Y in step 121IWS410), the effect control CPU 120 sets a prefetch zone effect execution flag (step 121IWS411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter for counting the number of executions of the prefetch zone effect to 0 (step 121IWS412). The pre-read zone effect execution flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and the pre-read zone effect is ended. Further, in this example, when a big hit does not occur even when the variable display is executed four times (when the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter becomes 4), when the variable display is ended. It is assumed that the pre-read zone effect execution flag is reset to end the pre-read zone effect.

  By executing the above processing, in this feature 121IW, execution of the pre-read zone effect may be determined when a new start prize is generated. When execution of the pre-read zone effect is determined, the pre-read zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when a big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable displays, the set value “ 1 ”to“ 3 ”.

  In this example, the case where presence / absence of the pre-reading zone effect is determined based on the pre-reading determination result indicated by the symbol designating command is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the presence / absence of a pre-read zone effect may be determined based on a pre-read determination result (for example, whether or not super reach is achieved) indicated by the variable category command.

  Further, in this example, when execution of the prefetch zone effect is determined, the prefetch zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started. I can't. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as the start timing of the prefetch zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the prefetch zone effect is determined in the prefetch notice setting process, it is further determined whether the start timing of the prefetch zone effect is the first variation, the second variation, or the third variation. The pre-read zone effect may be started from the determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration production (step 121IWS502, step 121IWS503). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the customer waiting demonstration production (N in step 121IWS 506), and whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches a predetermined condition. (Step 121IWS507). In step 121IWS507, for example, when a timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the change display has not been executed once and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period elapses without executing variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 121IWS508). That is, in step 121IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not yet started.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 121IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  In the feature 121IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp has a first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the controlled waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect aspect is controlled. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121IWS510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), lottery processing based on random numbers is performed in accordance with allocation of determination values according to setting values stored in the setting value storage area, The presence / absence and execution mode of the pre-game suggestion effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 11-9 (A), determination values are assigned in order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3” so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed. It has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Moreover, as shown to FIG. 11-9 (A), it may be determined as the 3rd production aspect only when it is setting value "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting change has been performed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS511). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, the production mode is determined (step 121IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS511 to S512 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and it is not determined as the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS513). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  FIG. 11-9 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself determined is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS513 to S514, in this feature unit 121IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode, thereby reducing the situation where the player is disappointed and discouraged, thereby preventing the lowering of interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 121IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 121IWS515). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is limited so as not to be executed.

  By executing the processing of step 121IWS513, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, The situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed despite the unfavorable set value being set and the player is discouraged is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion production may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIG. 11-9 (A), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects seems to be performed according to a setting value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at different ratios according to the setting value. This is because the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  The feature 121IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, even when the setting is not changed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 11-9 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of recovery is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) and the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), when the command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When not being performed, the proportion of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect is low and the difference in execution proportion between the set values is also smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing in this way, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a form including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (excluding pre-game suggestion effects) (step 121IWS516). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the processing of step 121IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestion effects (indication suggestion during game or suggestion effect during jackpot), execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A demonstration of waiting for a customer in a manner in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 121IWS 516 is executed, a customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the production control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (the production mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. Information may be stored, and an effect may be executed in which a setting value is estimated from the information and notified. In addition, this production | presentation alert | reports the setting expectation degree (or setting value estimated) calculated based on the predetermined reference | standard from the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect | action, and does not alert | report an actual setting value. .

  In this feature part 121IW, the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 121IWS508 to 121IWS515. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of step 121IWS516, but information related to the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, and the interest can be enhanced. . Note that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using, for example, a real-time clock or the like, without being limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW. Also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information related to the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature section 121IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 when the game ends You may comprise. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by a player accessing the Web server using a mobile terminal (or analyzing a two-dimensional code) and displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. Moreover, the setting suggestion image which suggests a setting value may be displayed on the display apparatus with which a portable terminal is equipped, when a player reads the two-dimensional code containing execution history information using a portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step 121IWS602). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration of the decorative pattern) is performed according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by the processing of the step 121IWS602 being executed by the effect control CPU 120. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop pattern in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  In step 121IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stopped symbols. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as the stop symbols. To do.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, the combination of “135” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is A, and the combination of “357” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is B. In the case of the type C, a combination of “579” is determined as the small hit symbol.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 121IWS602, displays a chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream). The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display to start this time includes super reach (step 121IWS 603). Whether or not the display is a change display including super reach can be specifically determined by confirming the change pattern designated by the change pattern command read out in step 121IWS601. In the case of variable display including super reach, the production control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops during the variable display of decorative symbols. The type of super reach to be performed is determined (step 121IWS 604).

  FIGS. 11-11 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach kind determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-11 (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “1”. FIG. 11-11 (B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “2”. FIG. 11-11 (C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

  In this example, when the super reach is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols, it can be developed into four types of super reach A to D. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach B is the highest. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the set value is “2”, the ratio of determining to execute super reach C is the highest. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), when the set value is “3”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach D is the highest.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines an icon pattern to be displayed during the super reach according to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121IWS605). In step 121IWS605, the effect control CPU 120 selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to the set value, performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected icon pattern determination table, and the icon pattern. To decide.

  FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the icon pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-12 (A) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “1”. FIG. 11-12 (B) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the setting value is “2”. FIG. 11C illustrates a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the setting value is “3”.

  In this example, when the start timing of the super reach is reached during the decorative pattern variation display, the panel images A to D corresponding to each of the super reach A to D overlap the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the top. Is displayed. Then, in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel image corresponding to the super reach A is deleted in order, and the effect is developed into a type of super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the beginning. Is executed.

  In this example, when it is determined that super reach A is to be executed, the panel image corresponding to super reach A is displayed at the top without erasing the panel image even if the push button 31B is operated. The state remains unchanged. If it is decided to execute super reach B, the panel image corresponding to super reach B is displayed at the top, and the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is operated further. The panel image corresponding to Super Reach B does not change while being displayed at the top. If it is determined that the super reach C is to be executed, if the panel image corresponding to the super reach C is displayed at the top, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. The panel image corresponding to the super reach C is not changed as it is displayed at the top.

  In this example, icon images may be displayed on the panel images B to D corresponding to the super reach B to D, respectively, depending on the icon image displayed on the panel image that is finally displayed at the top. The suggestion effect during reach is executed by suggesting the current set value.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns, icon patterns 1-9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which no icon image is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, when the icon pattern 1 is determined, it is determined that the suggestion effect during reach is not executed. The icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), when the set value is “1”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B is compared. (In the case of jackpot, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a loss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of super reach B is high, so that the icon image “●” is finally displayed on the panel B displayed at the top. The probability that the set value is “1” is high, and the set value “1” is suggested.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), when the setting value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C. Is relatively high (if the jackpot is selected with a total probability of 60%, if out of place, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “2”, the execution ratio of the super reach C is high, so that the icon image “▲” is finally displayed on the panel C displayed at the top. , The probability of the set value “2” is high, and the set value “2” is suggested.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), when the set value is “3”, the icon patterns 5 and 7 to 9 in which the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D are displayed. The selection ratio is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a loss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “3”, the execution ratio of the super reach D is high, so that the icon image “★” is finally displayed on the panel D displayed at the top. , The probability of the set value “3” is high, and the set value “3” is suggested.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected when the set value is “1”, it is determined that the game is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the big hit for a certain combination of the set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value “1” and the icon pattern 2). Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when the setting value is “1”, the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate even if the setting value is “1”. May be.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), when the set value is “1” or “2”, the ratio of the icon pattern 9 being selected is extremely 1%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), when the setting value is “3”, the ratio of the icon pattern 9 being selected is relatively high (30% probability for big hits). In case of loss, it is selected with a probability of 20%). Therefore, in this example, when the icon image “★” is displayed on all the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage with respect to a combination of a specific set value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of the set value “3” and the icon pattern 9). For example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, the setting value “3” may be determined.

  In this example, as an example in which the degree of expectation for the setting value differs depending on the combination of a specific setting value and the icon pattern, the setting value “3” is set for the combination of the setting value “3” and the icon pattern 9. Although the case where the expectation degree with respect to becomes high was shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, a combination of a setting value “1” that increases the expectation level for the setting value “1” and an icon pattern, or a combination of a setting value “2” that increases the expectation level for the setting value “2” and an icon pattern May be provided.

  In this example, an icon image is displayed in super reach and a suggestion effect during reach is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the reach suggestion effect may be executed in a full rotation reach in which all three decorative symbols rotate in a state where all the left middle right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern. Further, in this case, for example, a combination of a specific set value and the full rotation reach may be configured such that a sense of expectation with respect to a set value having a high advantage is increased.

  Also, the types of icon patterns are not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, a case where icon images are displayed on all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A as in icon patterns 2 to 9 is shown, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. It is not necessary to display the icon image on all, and it may be configured such that there is an icon pattern in which the icon image is displayed only on any one or two of the panel images B to D.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence and effect mode of the game suggestion effect (step 121IWS606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pre-read zone effect executing flag is set (step 121IWS607). If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is set, CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the change display to be started this time is the change display of the first special symbol (step 121IWS608). Whether or not to start the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the first symbol variation designation command transmitted at the start of the variable display (designates to start the variable display of the first special symbol) It can be determined by confirming whether or not an effect control command is received. If the first special symbol variation display is to be started, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter (step 121IWS609).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter after the addition is 1 (step 121IWS610). If the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter is 1 (that is, if the first change pre-read zone effect is executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the first effect pattern as the pre-read zone effect pattern (step 121IWS611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

  If the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is a big hit (step 121IWS612). Whether or not the display is a variable display that is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter as a table for determining the prefetch zone effect pattern (step) 121IWS613). If the display is not a big win, the effect control CPU 120 selects a prefetch zone effect pattern determination table for detachment according to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter as a table for determining the prefetch zone effect pattern. (Step 121 IWS 614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected prefetch zone effect pattern determination table, and determines a prefetch zone effect pattern (step 121IWS615).

  FIGS. 11-14 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone effect pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 11-14 (A) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 2 (when the prefetch zone effect of the second variation is executed). ing. Further, FIG. 11-14 (B) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 2 (when the pre-read zone effect of the second change is executed). Yes. FIG. 11-14 (C) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when the prefetch zone effect of the third variation is executed). Yes. Further, FIG. 11-14 (D) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 3 (when the pre-read zone effect of the third variation is executed). Yes. Further, FIG. 11-14 (E) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when the prefetch zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). Yes. Further, FIG. 11-14 (F) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 4 (when the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in this example, there are three types of prefetch zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as prefetch zone effect patterns. The pre-read zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “1” if it is a big hit in the current variation display. In addition, the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “2” if it is a big hit in the current variation display. In addition, the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “3” if it is a big hit in the current variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 11-14, in this example, when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 2 (when the pre-read zone effect of the second variation is executed), the set value is “1” and a big hit is obtained. The pre-read zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. Further, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when the prefetch zone effect of the third change is executed), when the set value is “2” and the big hit, the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is as high as 80%. Select by percentage. Further, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when the prefetch zone effect of the fourth variation is executed), the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is set to 80% higher when the set value is “3” and the big hit is achieved. Select by percentage. Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value “1” is suggested in the second change look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy of the setting value “1” is high and set in the third change look-ahead zone effect. When the value “2” is suggested and the big hit is made, the accuracy of the setting value “2” is high, and when the setting value “3” is suggested and the big hit is given by the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation The accuracy of the set value “3” is configured to be high.

  Note that the configuration of the prefetch zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to use a different look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table or to distribute the judgment values differently depending on whether or not the current change display is a change display of a pre-read zone effect notice target. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the current variation display is a variation display subject to the advance notice of the pre-read zone effect, if the current variation display is out of date, the pre-read zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the set value “3” or the like is high. You may comprise so that the pattern which suggests a setting may become easy to be selected.

  Next, if the execution of the variation pattern, the prefetch zone effect, the reach suggestion effect, or the game suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prefetch zone effect (for example, the prefetch zone effect pattern) or the reach. A process table corresponding to the medium suggestion effect (for example, icon pattern) and the game suggestion effect is selected (step 121IWS616). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121IWS617).

  The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 121IWS 618).

  In this feature portion 121IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variable pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one command at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area, The contents of the command storage area at the start winning prize are shifted (step 121IWS620).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121IWS621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Indication suggestion processing during game)
FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game suggestion effect determination process (step 121IWS606). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 121IWS 702) when it is in the special period (Y in step 121IWS701), and is not in the special period. In the case (N in Step 121IWS701), the second game suggestion effect determination table is selected (Step 121IWS703). For example, a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and the special period flag is reset when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 121IWS 701 whether or not it is during the special period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS 704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution are determined (step 121IWS705).

  FIG. 11-16 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 11-16 (B) is a second game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

  In addition, with respect to the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A) The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger. In other words, the second rendering mode has a high degree of reliability with respect to being set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first rendering mode.

  In addition, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a special period can be provided, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (appearance of character C) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, the setting value “3” is determined by executing the game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS706). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 121IWS707).

  When the processing of steps 121IWS706 to S707 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A. The presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio itself determined to execute the suggestion effect during gaming is low and the ratio determined as the second effect mode Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS708). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C (step 121IWS709).

  FIG. 11-16 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. There is also no case of being determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS708 to S709, in this feature 121IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are executed to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the player is discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the game.

  By executing the process of step 121IWS708, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is disappointed and disappointed is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 11-16 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute a game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. This is because the game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, although it is comprised so that a suggestion during game of the common aspect (for example, 1st effect aspect) can be performed by a special period and a non-special period, it is not restricted to such a structure. It may be possible to execute a different suggestion effect during the game. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the feature unit 121IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game and the effect mode in the execution are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period is set and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of reach production, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous production, the type of pseudo-continuous production, the display result is a big hit Depending on whether or not the game suggestion effect is executed, whether or not it is executed may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during game may be executable only when the variation pattern includes a reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the degree of reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed increases, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-continuous effect (or the number of pseudo-continuous times is smaller than that of the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. It may be made higher, or the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased and is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. The degree of reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. .

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart of the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS801) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS804). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 121IWS805).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach is being executed (step 121IWS806). Whether or not the super reach is being executed can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process, for example. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (step 121IWS807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in an ON state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of operations of the push button 31B (number of repeated hits). The value of the operation number counter is incremented by 1 (step 121IWS808).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined to be super reach A (step 121IWS809). If it is determined to be super reach A, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach A (that is, if determined to be super reach B to D), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 ( Step 121IWS810). If the value of the operation counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to delete the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 121IWS811).

  If the super-reach B to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121IWS 809 to S811, the display is started in the state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and then the push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the button 31B being operated once.

  If the value of the operation counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined as super reach B (step 121IWS812). If it is determined to be super reach B, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach B (that is, if determined to be super reach C to D), the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the operation number counter at the first predetermined number (for example, 10). (Step 121IWS813). If the value of the operation number counter is the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121IWS814).

  When the super-reach C to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121IWS812 to S814, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A Is erased, the panel image B is erased based on the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of continuous push operations of the push button 31B.

  If the value of the operation number counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined to be super reach C (step 121IWS815). If it is determined to be super reach C, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach C (that is, if it is determined to be super reach D), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the operation number counter is a second predetermined number (for example, 20). It is confirmed whether or not (step 121IWS816). If the value of the operation number counter is the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121IWS817).

  When the process of steps 121IWS815 to S817 is executed and the super reach D is determined, the display is started with the panel images A to D overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A and the panel are displayed. After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times) of continuous push buttons 31B.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation valid period during super reach has ended (step 121IWS818). Whether or not the operation valid period has ended can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation valid period has not expired, the process proceeds to step 121IWS826. If the operation valid period has ended, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (step 121IWS819). If the value of the operation number counter is not 1 or more (if the value of the operation number counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B has not been operated once within the effective operation period during super reach)) The process proceeds to step 121IWS824.

  If the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation effective period during super reach), the effect control CPU 120 uses the super reach type as the super reach type. It is confirmed whether or not the reach C is determined (step 121IWS820). If it is determined that it is super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to forcibly erase the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS821). Note that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that at least the panel image A should have been deleted at this stage.

  If not determined as super reach C, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is determined as super reach D as the type of super reach (step 121IWS822). If it is determined that it is super reach D, the CPU 120 for effect control forcibly erases the panel image B or the panel image C if the panel image B or the panel image C is still displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 121IWS823). Note that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that at least the panel image A should have been deleted at this stage.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined to be super reach D (that is, if determined to be super reach A or super reach B), the process proceeds to step 121IWS824.

  In this example, when the process of steps 121IWS819 to S823 is executed and the player is determined to be super reach C or super reach D, the player operates the push button 31B to the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if it is determined as super reach C, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if it is determined as super reach D, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. The state is displayed at the top. On the other hand, when it is determined that the super reach is BD, and the player does not operate the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top). ), The panel image A is not changed while it is displayed at the top.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top of the image display device 5 (step 121IWS824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach A. When the panel image B is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach C. When the panel image D is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121IWS825).

  Thereafter, in accordance with the process data switched in step 121IWS 824, the processing of step 121IWS 805 is executed at the timing of the next and subsequent timer interruptions, thereby producing effects that develop into super reach AD.

  It should be noted that the value of the operation number counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is terminated or the variable display is terminated.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display effect processing.

(Determination processing during big hit)
FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect determination process is executed in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 121IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  In step S121IWS902, when the variation display is performed for a specific time (100 times in this example) from the start of the game (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific time), the first shown in FIG. 11-20 (A). When the big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-20 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined. The “game start time” here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this feature part 121IW, the period from when the game is started until when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from when the game is started until the variation display is executed a specific time (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from when the game is started until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

  In both the first and second big hit suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the big hit suggestion effect.

  Moreover, about the 2nd production mode and the 3rd production mode, the ratio which is executed in order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, execution ratio between setting values in specific period and non-specific period The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a specific period can be given, and interest can be enhanced. In addition, not only the structure of this characteristic part 121IW but the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

  Moreover, as shown to FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), it may be determined as a 4th effect mode only when it is setting value "3". Therefore, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the feature section 121IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B1), a speech C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), after the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, As shown in 14-9 (C <b> 1), a speech D image (“high setting confirmation”) 121 </ b> IW 105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS903). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 121IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS903 to S904 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the rendering mode A. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the setting of an unfavorable setting value, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage are executed with the big hit suggesting stage and the player is disappointed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS905). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. If it is the production mode C, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit suggestion production and the production mode using the big hit suggestion production determination table for the production mode C (step 121IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  FIG. 11-20 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-20 (C), in the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself determined to execute the big hit suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS905 to S906, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of being present, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage can be used to reduce the situation in which the big hit suggesting stage is executed and disappointing the player and discouraging the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to perform the big hit suggestion production.

  By executing the processing of step 121IWS905, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even in the case where the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the big hit suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit suggestion effect is set as a whole lower than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B) is used. The presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 3rd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), when the big hit is made in a specific period, the hint effect is always executed during the big hit, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, you may make it vary the ratio which is not performed according to a setting value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), the ratio that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio that is not executed according to the set value is different. You may make it let.

  Moreover, in this feature part 121IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, it is configured so that a big hit suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image indicating a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or notice effect is executed.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute a big hit suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value. This is a big hit suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third The execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode is different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. This is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory effect (step 121IWS907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A1), it is assumed that a movable member 121IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A1) and (B2), when the effect effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In this feature 121IW, since the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 121IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 The dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the effect effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 121IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the suggestive effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 121IWS907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and reducing the interest. Also, with such a configuration, even if the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, It is also possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 121IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at the position overlapping the speech image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. Moreover, you may make it restrict | limit execution of an effect production only for a specific period. Moreover, not only the example shown to FIG. 11-20 (D), but also when a big hit suggestion production | presentation is performed, you may make it perform an accessory effect in a low ratio.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the accessory effect (N in Step 121IWS908), the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect is determined (Step 121IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, there is provided a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate. In addition, it is assumed that there is provided a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 121IW103 by the light emitter and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine. And it can perform the light-guide plate effect which radiate | emits light to the front surface of a game machine from the reflection part provided in the light-guide plate 121IW103 by light-emitting a light-emitting body. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, and “big hit” Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 121IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-20 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios according to the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. The Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the jackpot of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being high is high, and the suggestion during the jackpot of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio that the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the big hit suggestive effect is difficult to visually recognize. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the speech A image ("Setting is ...") 121IW104 is displayed by the effect indication during the big hit of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  Next, an effect aspect of the prefetch zone effect will be described. FIGS. 11-23 and FIGS. 11-24 are explanatory drawings for explaining the effect of the prefetch zone effect. In addition, in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, an effect aspect shall transition in order of (A) (B) (C) ....

  As shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), a start winning to the first starting winning opening is newly generated during the decorative symbol display, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold memory display unit 121IW109. Suppose that it became the state. Then, it is assumed that the execution of the pre-read zone effect is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start winning opening.

  Next, when the first variation display is executed after the start winning is given to the first start winning opening, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the prefetch zone effect based on the initial effect pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the character display 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 121IW111 of “Zone rush!” Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 121IW110. .

  If the first variation display is a big hit, the pre-read zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 11-23 (C) is not transferred (so, in this case, the pre-read zone is not displayed). Although the production is performed, the set value is not substantially suggested).

  Next, it is assumed that the pre-read zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the pre-read zone effect pattern when the second variable display is executed after occurrence of the start winning at the first start winning opening (see FIGS. 11-14). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is “If this is the case, setting“ 1 ”?” A character display 121IW112 is displayed.

  Note that when the second variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 11-23 (D) is not shifted. In this case, “If set right now, setting“ 1 ”? It is suggested that the setting value “1” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW112 of “” is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that the pre-read zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the pre-read zone effect pattern when the third variation display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening is generated (see FIG. 11-14). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is “If this is the case, setting“ 2 ”?” A character display 121IW113 of “” is displayed.

  Note that if the third variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 11-23 (D) is not transferred. In this case, “If it is right now, setting“ 2 ”? It is suggested that the setting value “2” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW113 of “” is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that the pre-read zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the pre-read zone effect pattern when the fourth variable display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening is generated (see FIG. 11-14). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (E), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (E), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is set to “If set right now? A character display 121IW114 is displayed.

  If the third variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated. In this case, “If set right now, setting“ 3 ”? It is suggested that the set value “3” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW114 is displayed. Further, in this example, the prefetch zone effect is also ended when a big hit does not occur in the third variation display (therefore, in this case, the so-called “gaze prefetch zone effect” is executed). ).

  11-23 and FIG. 11-24 are merely examples. For example, even when the second variable display is executed after the start winning prize, a low ratio is shown in FIG. 11-23 (C). In some cases, a pre-read zone effect suggesting the set value “2” or “3” may be executed (see FIG. 11-14). In addition, for example, even when the third variation display is executed after the start winning prize, a pre-read zone effect that suggests the set values “1” and “3” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 11-23 (D). (See FIGS. 11-14). Further, for example, even when the fourth variation display is executed after the start winning prize, the look-ahead zone effect that suggests the set values “1” and “2” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 11-24 (E). (See FIGS. 11-14).

  In addition, in this example, in the case where the first variation display is executed after the start winning prize, the pre-read zone effect is executed based on the first effect pattern, and the character display 121IW111 of “Zone rush!” Is displayed. However, even when the first variation display is executed, the effects suggesting the set values “1” to “3” in the same manner as in FIGS. 11-23 (C) to 11-24 (E). May be configured to execute.

  Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the set value is suggested as a predetermined condition established based on the occurrence of a big hit during execution of the prefetch zone effect, but this is not the only mode. For example, it may be configured such that a predetermined value is suggested as a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined character is displayed or a lamp or LED emits light during execution of the prefetch zone effect, Can be considered.

  Further, in this example, the case where the pre-read zone effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value is suggested in the effect performed during one variation display. You may comprise. For example, a gauge display in which the indicator moves as time elapses is displayed on the image display device 5 during one variation display, and at what point the indicator is in the gauge display, a certain achievement condition is established ( For example, a setting value may be suggested based on winning a battle or clearing a mission.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, when the pre-read zone effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays, “change now, setting“ 1 ”” for each variable display. ? "Or" If set right now, setting "2"? " The case where the current set value is suggested by displaying a character display such as “” is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, during a single fluctuation display, “If you hit now, setting“ 1 ”? "Or" If set right now, setting "2"? " ”, Etc., are displayed in order, and the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that was finally displayed when the big hit occurred at the end of the variable display. Good. For example, “If it is right now, setting“ 2 ”? In the state where the character display of “” is displayed, if the variation display ends and a big hit occurs, it is suggested that the setting value is “2”. In the state where the character display of “” is displayed, when the variation display ends and a big hit occurs, the setting value “3” may be suggested. Further, when the character display is sequentially switched and displayed during one variation display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of occurrence of the notice effect or the timing of development of the reach effect. Good. Further, for example, in the case of variable display with pseudo-continuations, the character display may be switched at the timing of re-variation.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect aspect of a suggestion effect during reach. FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect mode of the suggestion effect during reach. In addition, in FIG. 11-25 and FIG. 11-26, an effect aspect shall transition in order of (A) (B) (C) ....

  As shown in FIG. 11-25 (A), when starting the variable display of decorative symbols, executing Super Reach D as the type of Super Reach based on the fact that Super Reach is specified by the change pattern. (See FIGS. 11-11), and the icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 11-12 (A) to (D)).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”), and normal reach occurs. Next, at the start time of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), in the image display device 5, the panel image A121IW115 corresponding to the super reach A and the panel image B121IW116 corresponding to the super reach B are headed. The panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and the panel image C121IW 118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in a state where they are sequentially overlapped. Further, based on the determination that the icon pattern is 5, the icon image “●” 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image “▲” 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. An icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed.

  Next, when an operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected once, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), the top panel image A121IW115 is deleted and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top. .

  Next, when the player hits the push button 31B repeatedly and the number of consecutive hits reaches a first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), as shown in FIG. 11-26 (E), the top panel image B121IW116 is deleted, The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

  Next, when the player hits the push button 31B repeatedly and the number of consecutive hits reaches the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), the top panel image C121IW117 is deleted, Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the super reach development timing is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (G), the last remaining panel image D121IW118 is displayed in an enlarged manner on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 26 (H), an effect of developing to super reach D is executed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current set value is It is suggested that the possibility of “3” is high.

  11-25 and 11-26 show the case where execution of super reach D is determined. For example, when execution of super reach A is determined, a push button is used. Even if 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 11-25 (C) does not change while being displayed at the top, and when the timing of super reach is reached, the panel image A121IW115 is displayed on the image display device 5. A display of an aspect that expands on the entire screen is performed, and an effect of an aspect that develops to super reach A is executed. For example, when execution of super reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. 11-25 (D) is changed only to the state displayed at the top. First, when it is time to develop Super Reach, the display of the aspect in which the panel image B121IW116 is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and the effect of the aspect of developing to Super Reach B is executed. For example, when execution of super reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIG. 11-26 (E) only changes to the state displayed at the top. First, when the super reach development timing is reached, a display in which the panel image C121IW117 is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed, and an effect of developing the super reach C is executed.

  In addition, for example, although the execution of super reach D is determined, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or does not repeatedly hit the second predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F). There may be a case where only the panel image D121IW118 is not displayed. In this case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. Developed into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B has never been operated and the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top. Instead, it develops into Super Reach A.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, even when the push button 31B is not operated once, it may be configured to forcibly develop into the super reach D. Even if it is determined that super reach D is to be executed, if only the panel image 121IW118 is not displayed, the final display depends on the panel image displayed at the top. It may be configured to develop into super reach B or super reach C.

  Further, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach that has nothing to do with the suggestion of the set value.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the icon images 121IW119 to 121 are displayed and the suggestion effect during reach is executed. For example, the icon pattern 1 is determined and the suggestion during reach is indicated. When it is determined that the effect is not executed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 11-25 (C) to 11-26 (G), and the icon images are not displayed.

  Note that, in this example, the case where the icon image is not displayed at all when the reach suggestion effect is not executed during the super reach is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed, an item image that is not related to the set value may be displayed on each panel image so as not to be related to the suggestion of the set value. .

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, the panel image is erased one by one in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, so that one stage of super reach production is performed. Although the case where the setting value is suggested in the effect of the aspect that goes up is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a meter display that gradually increases the meter level according to the player's operation, it is configured to suggest a set value by performing icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value Also good. In addition, for example, the reach production itself such as super reach does not change step by step, and only the icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value changes step by step according to the player's operation. May be. In addition, for example, it is not always necessary to involve the player's operation, and the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value may be configured to change step by step regardless of the operation. Conceivable.

  Also, for example, the reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26 may be associated with the display result of the variable display. For example, when the reach suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 11-25 and FIG. 11-26 is executed, and a big hit occurs in the change display, the setting value suggested in the suggestion effect during reach is fixed, Or you may comprise so that it may become more than the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect during reach.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (C) to 11-26 (E), icon images are also displayed so as to be visible for panel images other than the panel image displayed at the top. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the icon image may be displayed only in the panel image displayed at the top. In this case, for example, in FIG. 11-25 (C), the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, so that the panel image B121IW116 to the panel image D121IW118 are all displayed with no icon image displayed. After that, in FIG. 11-25 (D), when the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Next, in FIG. 11-26 (E), when the panel image B121IW116 is deleted and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117. Next, in FIG. 11-26 (F), when the panel image C121IW117 is deleted and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed, the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. May be.

  In this example, for example, even though the execution of super reach D is determined, the player does not repeatedly hit the push button 31B up to the second predetermined number and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. If there is no change, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the head if the push button 31B is operated at least once. However, when the icon image is displayed only for the panel image displayed at the top as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are not displayed at the top. Image B121IW116 and panel image C121IW View 17 of icon images may be constructed so as not. Even if the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for an extremely short time (for example, 1 second), so that they are extremely short. The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 only for a time (for example, 1 second).

  In this feature 121IW, the effect effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect aspect of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is an aspect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. The priority may be given to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  In this feature 121IW, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbols are variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having decorative symbols arranged on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative symbol on the surface (that is, the decorative symbol may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the feature). May occur). Therefore, in the first-time fluctuation after changing the setting, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in this feature part 121IW, the effect effect and light guide plate effect are configured so that the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit can be reduced, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is made to the player. For example, when even-numbered initial outcomes are displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestion effect during game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the effect effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the present invention is not limited to an effect effect or a light guide plate effect, but includes an effect including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED to emit light in a predetermined manner By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 121IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific manner. Thus, the setting may be suggested.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) that suggests setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory being 0 or the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number is generated. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control, etc.) based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation effective period. (E.g., light emission control of the lamp) may be executed.

(Direction after small hit game)
Next, the effect after the small hit game will be described.

(Small hit end effect processing)
FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the small hit end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step 121IWS1001). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction timed out (step 121IWS1002). The effect period measurement timer is set based on confirmation of reception of the small hit end designation command in the small hit effect processing (see step S174), for example.

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in Step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step 121IWS1003). Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 121IWS1004).

  Next, if the process timer has not timed out (NO at step 121IWS1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121IWS1005), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step 121IWS1007).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect stage determination table corresponding to the small hit type as a table for determining whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether or not to change the effect stage after the small hit game ends and the type of the effect stage after the change. (Step 121IWS1009).

  FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect stage determination table. Among these, FIG. 12-2 (A) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type is A. FIG. 12-2 (B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type is B. FIG. 12-2 (C) shows a specific example of an effect stage determination table that is selected when the small hit type is C.

  As shown in FIG. 12-2, determination values are assigned to the production stage determination table for the production stage no change, the production stage A change, the production stage B change, and the production stage C change. Yes. When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of change to the effect stage A is high. Therefore, in this example, when the stage is changed to the stage A after the end of the small hit game, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”. Further, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the setting value is “2”, the ratio of the production stage B is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the setting value is “2” when the stage is changed to the production stage B after the end of the small hit game. In addition, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 12B, the production stage C may be changed only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, in this example, when the stage is changed to the production stage C after the end of the small hit game, it is suggested that the setting value is “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hit type C, when the set value is “1”, the stage A is selected at a high rate of 50%. When the setting value is “2”, the production stage B is selected at a high rate of 60%, and when the setting value is “3”, the production stage C is selected at a high rate of 50%. Yes. Therefore, in this example, the setting value suggestion by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C is most reliable. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of the small hit type A, when the set value is “1”, there is only 30% of the stage to select the effect stage A, and when the set value is “2”, the effect stage. The ratio of selecting B is only 40%, and when the setting value is “3”, the ratio of selecting stage stage C is only 30%. Accordingly, in this example, the setting value suggestion by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the stage is not necessarily changed after the end of the small hit game, and it may be determined that the stage is not changed, but the setting value “1” is used. Depending on which of “3”, the ratio determined without changing the stage is different (in other words, the ratio of changing the stage is also different).

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12B, an effect stage C that is determined to be the set value “3” is provided, and a specific effect stage (in this example, an effect stage is determined). The rate of change to stage C) is different. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, even when the set value is “1” or “2”, the stage may be changed to the stage C at a low rate.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the lottery process by the effect control CPU 120 shows a case where the presence / absence of the effect stage is changed or the determination stage type of the effect stage after the change is changed. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the gaming machine is configured such that the small hit probability varies depending on which of the set values “1” to “3”, the stage change is caused by the fact that the small hit probability varies depending on the set value. You may comprise so that the determination ratio of the presence or absence of a stage and the kind of production stage after a change may be varied. In addition, for example, it is configured so that the presence / absence of the stage change for each small hit type and the determination stage ratio of the stage stage after the change are the same, and any of the set values “1” to “3” Accordingly, by determining the small hit type according to different ratios, it may be configured so that the presence / absence of the production stage is changed or the decision stage type of the production stage after the change is changed.

  When it is determined to change the effect stage (Y in step 121IWS1010), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the changed effect stage. Control to change is performed (step 121IWS1011).

  In this feature 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the stage is changed, a background image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. And

  In addition, not only in the mode shown in this example, for example, after changing the stage, after a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the variable display, the display returns to the normal stage and returns to the normal background image. It may be configured. In addition, for example, the stage may be configured to change every time a small hit occurs, and once the stage is changed, the stage is not changed even if a small hit occurs. It may be configured.

  In addition, in this example, when the stage is changed after the small hit game ends, a background image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. It cannot be caught. For example, it is not always necessary to perform the display over a plurality of fluctuation displays, and an effect that suggests a set value is executed only once after the small hit game ends (a single effect that suggests a set value is executed). It may be configured.

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 121IWS1012), and ends the small hit end effect process.

  Next, an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game. In addition, in FIG. 12-3 and FIG. 12-4, an effect aspect shall transition in order of (A) (B) (C).

  First, in the example illustrated in FIG. 12C, the setting value “1” is assumed to be set. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the variation display of the left middle right decorative symbol is executed, and as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the small hit type B small hits are used as the decorative symbol stop symbols. It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “357”) is confirmed and displayed and a small hit game is executed. Then, it is determined that the stage is changed to the stage A that suggests that the set value is “1”. As shown in FIG. Assume that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the background image corresponding to the stage A is changed to an image in which a group of fish 121IW106 is swimming in the sea.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 12D, it is assumed that the setting value is “3”. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the variation display of the left middle right decorative symbol is executed, and as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), a small hit type C small hit as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is executed. Assume that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of “579”) is confirmed and displayed and a small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the stage stage C that suggests that the set value is “3”, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the stage stage C as shown in FIG. Assume that the background image has been changed. The example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C) shows a case where the background image corresponding to the effect stage C is changed to an image in which the rocket 121IW107 flies toward the moon 121IW108 in outer space.

  12-3 and 12-4 are examples. For example, in the case of the small hit type A, the small hit in FIGS. 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B). A small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of “135”) may be fixedly displayed. For example, when the stage is changed to the stage B, the background image corresponding to the stage B (for example, a flock of birds flying in the air in FIGS. 12-3 (C) and 12-4 (C)). The image may be changed to an image such as

  In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the case where the stage is changed to the stage A is shown. However, in this example, the stage is changed to the stage B at a low rate even when the setting value is “1”. (See Fig. 12-2). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-4, the case where the stage is changed to the stage stage C is shown. It may be changed to B (see FIG. 12-2).

  In addition, the production mode in the case of changing the production stage after the end of the small hit game is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4. For example, a battle effect is executed at the end of a small hit game, and if the teammate wins the battle, the stage is changed and the background image is switched, and the set value is suggested. If the teammate character loses the battle, the stage The background image may not be changed. Various production modes are conceivable.

  In this example, the setting value is suggested by changing the stage after the small hit game ends. However, the method for suggesting the set value in relation to the small hit is shown in this example. It cannot be caught. For example, when a small hit game period is secured to some extent, it may be configured to suggest a set value by causing a predetermined character or the like associated with the set value to appear during the small hit game. . Further, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (decorative symbol combinations) are provided, the small hit symbol is configured to be associated with the set value, and any of the small hit symbols is stopped and displayed. The setting value may be suggested depending on whether or not. In addition, for example, when it is configured to be able to shift to the so-called probability variation latency state after suddenly large hit or small hit, it can be configured to suggest a set value depending on whether the probability change latency period after small hit is long or short, or the probability change latency period An effect that suggests a set value may be executed.

  Further, in this example, the case is shown in which the production stage is changed as the predetermined condition is satisfied when the small hit game ends, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed, and the production stage may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established based on winning the lottery. Further, for example, the stage may be configured so that a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the number of executions of the variable display has reached a predetermined number.

(Modification of production after small hit game)
In this feature 121IW, the stage was changed after the end of the small hit game, and the setting value was suggested by switching to the background image corresponding to the changed stage. You may comprise so that a setting value may be suggested by switching a pattern table and performing a series of setting value suggestion effects over several fluctuation displays. Hereinafter, a modification example in which the variation pattern table is switched after the small hit game is completed will be described.

  In the modified example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process, Assume that a small after-hit flag indicating that the hit game is over is set.

  FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart illustrating the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the modification. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the after-hit flag is set (step 121IWS1101). If the after-hit flag is not set (that is, after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as to whether it is a big hit, a small hit, A variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and the small hit type is selected (step 121IWS1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  If the after-hit flag is set (that is, after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 sets the value of the after-hit counter to count the number of fluctuations after the end of the small-hit game. Add (step 121IWS1103). Further, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for small hits as a table for determining the variation pattern (step 121IWS1104).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the counter number of times after hitting is a predetermined value (eg, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the counter number of times after small hit is not a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the after-hit counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the after-hit flag and resets (clears to 0) the after-hit counter (step 121IWS1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the variation pattern determination table selected in steps 121IWS1102 and 1104, and determines a variation pattern (step 121IWS1107).

  In the modified example, the processing of steps 121IWS1103 to S1107 is executed, so that after the small hit game is finished, the change display for a predetermined value (for example, three change displays) is completed until the small hit is completed. A variation pattern is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed variation pattern is determined with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern dedicated to small hits.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the fluctuation display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game is finished, if the big hit or the small hit is reached, You may comprise so that the variation pattern for winning may be determined.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS1108).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

  FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart illustrating variable display start setting processing (step S171) in the modification. In the modification, the processing of steps 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 11-10. When the decorative design stop symbol is determined in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 is a variation pattern dedicated to after small hit (step 121). 121IWS631). In the case of the variation pattern dedicated to after the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect count counter for counting the number of effects of the suggested effect after the small hit indicating the set value after the end of the small hit game to 1 Add (step 121IWS632).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the effect counter after the addition is 1 (step 121IWS633). If the value of the performance counter is not 1 (that is, if the second and subsequent fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished), the process proceeds to step 121IWS636. If the value of the performance counter is 1 (that is, if the first variation display after the small hit game is finished), the production control CPU 120 determines the type of the suggested effect after the small hit. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the after-hit suggestion effect determination table to determine the type of the after-hit suggestion effect (step 121IWS634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined type of after-hit suggestion effect in the storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS635).

  FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the after-hit suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-7, in this example, there are three types of after-hit suggestion effects 1 to 3 as types of after-hit suggestion effects. In this example, the suggestion effect after small hits varies between the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, in a total of 90 seconds of three fluctuation displays fixed after 30 seconds). It is configured as a series of effects executed in such a manner that the story develops in order as the display is executed. Among these, after the small hit suggestion effect 1, a series of effects are executed and an effect suggesting that the set value is finally “1” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and the last third variation is performed. A character reminiscent of the set value “1” in a battle victory). The after-hit suggestion effect 2 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects is executed and finally is a set value “2” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and is set at the last third variation. The character reminiscent of the value “2” wins in battle). The after-hit suggestion effect 3 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects is executed and finally is a set value “3” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and is set at the last third variation. The character reminiscent of the value “3” wins the battle).

  As shown in FIG. 12-7, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of selecting the after-hit suggestion effect 1 is high, and when the setting value is “2”, the after-hit When the suggestion effect 2 is selected at a high rate and the setting value is “3”, the ratio at which the post-hit suggestion effect 3 is selected is high.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the type of the determined after-hit suggestion effect (step 121IWS636). In this case, in the case of the first variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of Y in step 121IWS633), it is determined in step 121IWS634 and is determined in step 121IWS635 according to the type after the small hit suggestion effect stored in the RAM122. Select the process table. In addition, in the case of the second variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of N in step 121IWS 633), the type of post-small hit suggestion effect determined in the first variation display after the end of the small hit game is Since the bag is stored in the RAM 122, a process table corresponding to the type is selected for the after-hit suggestion effect stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS617. Note that the processing after step 121IWS617 is the same as those shown in FIG. 11-10.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not dedicated to the small hit (N in Step 121IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 resets the effect number counter (clears to 0) (Step 121IWS637). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS603. Note that the processing after step 121 IWS 603 is the same as those shown in FIG. 11-10.

  In this example, after the end of the small hit game, a variation display fixed for 30 seconds is performed over three variations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects are executed for a total of 90 seconds. The number of fluctuations and the period to be executed are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, a variation display that is fixed for 20 seconds over four variations may be performed, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

  Although the characteristic part 121IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

  For example, in the feature part 121IW, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 121IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, as shown in FIG. Arranged toward the back side of the gaming machine 1, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic part 121IW)
As described above, the feature 121IW (second embodiment) includes the following first invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is not always possible to enhance the effect. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state;
Based on being controlled to the special state, a specific effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage); With
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at a different execution rate according to the set value that is set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting in step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIG. (Determining whether or not to change the stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, the control to the special state by the specific effect is performed. It is possible to increase the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit gaming state based on the small hit types A to C),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the setting value “1” is suggested by changing to the effect stage A The setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the production stage C).
Depending on the type of the special state that is controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value due to the execution of the specific effect varies (for example, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C as shown in FIG. 12-2) The suggestion of the set value by the stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the stage changed after the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific performance execution means is
There are cases where the specific effect is executed and the case where it is not executed depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. Is)
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect varies depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after finishing the special state (for example, the set value “1” as shown in FIG. 12-2). Depending on which of “3”, there is a change in the stage determined to have no stage change or change (change to stage A, change to stage B, change to stage C))
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Depending on the set value that has been set, the specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of types of effect states after the special state is finished (for example, FIG. (As shown in 12-2, the stage may be changed to the production stage C only when the set value is "3")
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that determines a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern). Steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 in FIG.
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the step 121IWS1101 is Y and the steps 121IWS1103 to S1107). Run)
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y is determined in step 121IWS631). Run)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the feature 121IW includes the following second invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is not always possible to enhance the effect. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a small hit), specific effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays. Step 121 IWS1008-S1011)
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at a different execution rate according to the set value that is set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting in step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIG. (Determining whether or not to change the stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, the specific effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. Can be performed, so the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the setting value “1” is suggested by changing to the effect stage A The setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the production stage C).
Depending on the type of the special state that is controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value due to the execution of the specific effect varies (for example, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C as shown in FIG. 12-2) The suggestion of the set value by the stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the stage changed after the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state
The specific performance execution means is
There are cases where a specific effect is executed and a case where the effect stage is not executed depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the effect stage is changed or not changed). And)
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect varies depending on the mode in which the effect state is shifted after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in 12-2, the set value “1” to Depending on whether it is “3”, the ratio determined as no change or change in the production stage (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C))
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Depending on the set value that has been set, the specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of types of effect states after the special state is finished (for example, FIG. (As shown in 12-2, the stage may be changed to the production stage C only when the set value is "3")
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that determines a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern). Steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 in FIG.
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the step 121IWS1101 is Y in step 121IWS1103). Execute S1107),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y is determined in step 121IWS631). Run)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

Further, the feature 121IW includes the third invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is not always possible to enhance the effect. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of performing the production,
The production execution means
A specific effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect) can be executed over a predetermined period,
An effect can be executed so that a set value is suggested when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of a big hit) during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14, a pre-read zone effect) If a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone effect according to the pattern 1, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”. If a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone effect according to the prefetch zone effect pattern 2, the setting value “2” is suggested. And if a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone production by the prefetch zone production pattern 3, it is suggested that the setting value is “3”)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect execution means can execute the effect such that the suggested setting value varies depending on the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14) In addition, when the setting value “1” is suggested by the second change look-ahead zone effect and a big hit, the accuracy of the setting value “1” is high, and the setting value “2” is set by the third change look-ahead zone effect. Is set to “2”, the accuracy of the setting value “2” is high, and the setting value “3” is suggested in the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation and the setting value “3” is reached. Is highly accurate)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a part for executing step 121IWS110 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Determination means (for example, a part for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination by the determination means;
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs prefetching based on a symbol designation command in the prefetch notice setting processing shown in FIG. 11-6. (Determine execution of zone production)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

The feature 121IW includes the following fourth invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is not always possible to enhance the effect. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, execute steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the CPU 120 for effect control and execute the suggestion effect during reach in step 121IWS616) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during reach) that suggests the set value. The process table is selected and a step 121IWS618 and S805 are executed).
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the suggested setting value in response to the player's motion being detected a plurality of times by the motion detection means (for example, for effect control) CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS806-S817)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
Reach effect execution means capable of executing reach effect (for example, super reach) (for example, a part for selecting a process table corresponding to super reach in step 121IWS616 in the effect control CPU 120 and executing steps 121IWS618 and S805),
The effect can be executed so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (C) to 11-26 (F), depending on the operation of the push button 31B). Panel images are deleted one by one)
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value indicated at the timing when the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIG. 11-25 (C) to FIG. 11−). As shown in FIG. 26 (F), the panel images on which the icon images 121IW119 to 120 indicating the set values are displayed are deleted one by one)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means may or may not execute the suggestion effect when executing the effect so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIGS. 11-12 and 11- 13, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which icon images are displayed are selected, and icon patterns 1 in which icon images are not displayed are selected.
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The reliability of the reach effect varies depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect (for example, when the set value is “1” as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A)). When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is confirmed that it is a big hit)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect varies (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 90-27, a super When the icon image by the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906)
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

The feature 121IW includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. For example, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. The suggestion effect determination means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 121IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). (Steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904 are executed based on the set value “1”)
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the feature 121IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect” includes determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also including determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-20 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is allowed to operate the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the feature 121IW includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means restricts execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs N in step 121IWS513 and N, S708). N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-20 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is allowed to operate the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature 121IW also includes the seventh invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. The suggestion effect determination means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 121IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, the big hit suggestion effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table, step 121IWS514. , S709 and S906 are executed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-20 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is allowed to operate the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. (FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  In addition, in this feature part 121IW, it is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when controlled to effect mode A, when set value information is not normally input, If the suggestion effect is configured to be executed as being set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the configuration of the fifth aspect described above) and is controlled in the effect mode B, the set value When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above). When the information is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the seventh invention described above). I can't catch it. For example, according to the gaming state, the control method according to any of the fifth to seventh inventions described above may be used to switch the suggestion effect. In this case, for example, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player. If the game state is a short time state, and the setting value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestion effect is limited (the above-described sixth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect when the set value information is not normally input ( (Configuration of the seventh invention described above))

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above, and the suggestion effect can be configured to be executed using only one of the control methods. Also good.

  Also, in the case of the feature part 121IW, if the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing or garbled data, the execution of the suggested effect is controlled by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions (suggestion Although the case where the production is limited) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. You may make it control (a suggestion effect is restrict | limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different in each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered set value such as the set value “1” or “3”, a long game occurs when a long game is likely to occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even number setting value such as setting value “2”, it is configured so that the likelihood of the extended resort is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that suggests an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions. It may be configured so as to restrict the suggestion effect.

  In addition, the method for controlling the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fifth to seventh inventions has not been normally received is the prefetch zone effect as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during reach, and the effect stage. It is also possible to apply to the production by the change.

The feature 121IW also includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) depending on the set value that has been set A game machine characterized in that it can execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means displays a suggestion effect (for example, different identification information for effect depending on the set value set) in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is described that the display of an odd number of initial appearances) may be executable, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 11). (As shown in -9 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during game play or a suggestion effect during jackpot) after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have higher reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 121IW includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be given effectively, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values being set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), ( B))
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. (For example, see FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of executions of reach effects or pseudo-continuous effects has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect) 11) (for example, when a big hit is generated within a specific period, the big hit suggestion can be executed). (See A) and (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-16 (A), (B), etc.)
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times that the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information related to the suggested suggestion that has been executed while waiting for a customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by the imaging device;
It is described that the specific image may be provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a form that can be captured by the imaging device. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 121IW also includes the following eleventh invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further includes a restricting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing overlaps with the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, either one is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting unit prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 11-20 (D). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting unit executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 121IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, suggesting during a big hit) Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image by the production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect in preference to the display related to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the feature part 121IW includes the following twelfth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest may be lowered by executing a setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value that has been set,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set values that have been set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-20 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) A gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with a hard-acting effect rendering, a light guide plate rendering, an error display, and the like is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification (for example, an effect effect) for operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101). The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light-transmitting light guide plate capable of transmitting light (for example, light guide plate 121IW103);
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) for emitting light to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the big hit of the first effect mode; see FIGS. 11-20 (A) and (B)). The second setting suggestion that suggests that the second setting value, which is more advantageous for the player than the first setting value, is set (for example, a big hit suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 11-20 ( A) and (B)) can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 11-20 (E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting a setting suggestion execution ratio (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided in the gaming machine (management The user can change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is arranged;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed. Decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 9-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that there may be provided suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Providing production execution means capable of performing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value set in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW also includes a fourteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 14th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 14th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 14th invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, euphoria becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 14th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period related to the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, gambling is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 14th invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first grand winning opening, the second large winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

(Other features)
As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the above-described features (feature portion 1560S, feature portion 121IW, etc.). In addition to or instead of this feature portion, It is good also as what has each characteristic part of characteristic part and characteristic part 71AK-75K. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 72AK described below, the effect control board 12 has operation motors AK011 to AK014 (not shown) for driving a movable member serving as a movable accessory (movable effect device). And origin sensors AK021 to AK024 (not shown) for detecting the origin position of the movable member. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be any motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor.

(Description of other features related to production control)
FIG. 14A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described feature section. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step AKS011) similar to that in the above embodiment, and then differs from the above embodiment in the power-on command process (step AKS012) is executed. After executing the power-on command process, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed to wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), and production control process processing (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 14B is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step AKS012 as the power-on command process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 obtains an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H that is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H that is a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H that is a setting check start command (step AKS024). If it is not a setting check start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and awaited until a reception command is acquired. In addition, when a predetermined error determination time elapses because the reception command cannot be acquired, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, settings other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thus, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When a setting change start command is received, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and are not in the game stop state are not executed. Or a limit as a limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS025, control for starting the setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. After the setting change notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting change is finished (step AKS027). In step AKS027, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH that is a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. If the setting change end command has not been received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), a control to end the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the setting change notification control is thus completed, a game stop state end process is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state end process, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11 that has been invalidated. Thereby, for example, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting | reporting is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 so that the initialization notification can be executed. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of an operation that is a pressing operation of the clear switch 121IW050 accompanying the start of power supply upon power-on.

  If it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, settings other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thus, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and not in the game stop state are not executed. Or a limit as a limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. After the setting confirmation notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is finished (step AKS033). In step AKS033, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H that is a setting check end command, it may be determined that the setting check is to be ended. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation is not terminated (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  If it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting check is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), a control for ending the setting check notification is performed (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, after the setting confirmation notification control is completed, the game stop state end process is executed (step AKS035). Thereby, for example, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Then, you may perform control which performs a power failure recovery alert | report. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure, in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050 is not detected with the start of power supply upon power-on. Good.

  FIG. 14C illustrates the priority of control regarding notification or screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop state start process in step AKS025 or step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities regarding the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to make it possible to set the presence / absence and type, the current date and time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 such as magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc., so that the control for starting the setting change notification is performed at step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. If the control is started or the setting confirmation notification is started in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation ends. Even so, the display of the power saving function setting screen by switching the output amount changeover switch is not started. Thus, the display related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or the output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, since the display regarding a set value is performed appropriately, it can prevent that the trouble in the change operation of a set value arises.

(Explanation of modifications of other characteristic parts related to production control)
FIG. 14-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed in a modified example in which the setting check process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts processing after setting the timer interrupt in the main processing, the gaming machine clerk 3 is released by the game hall staff and the like, and a switching operation to turn on the setting key 121IW051 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 121IW029 displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 121IW052 or the clear switch 121IW050 is pressed by an attendant at a game hall or the like, and is a display for confirming the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is finished, the setting confirmation state is finished, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modification, after performing the effect random number update process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display monitor 121IW029 is confirming the setting in which the set setting value is displayed in a checkable manner (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in the period after the control in step AKS058 is performed until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting check is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not a setting check start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, if a setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not a game is in progress in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the on state (step AKS054). The progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the customer waiting transmitted from the main board 11 is awaited. It is determined whether or not a demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if there is no reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control for starting setting confirmation notification. Thereby, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By executing the setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented so that the effect during the execution is not stopped.

  When the setting check process is executed during the game on the main board 11 side, the setting check state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending a setting confirmation start command together with a customer waiting demo designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is sent, and the set value is set after the progress of the game is finished. It is also possible to perform control in a state in which it is possible to confirm.

  Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to perform display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting check process is executed during the game, a display on which the set value can be checked on the display monitor 121IW029 without transmitting a setting check start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is displayed. You may make it perform the control which starts. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executable. For example, in the power-on command process, the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command process, the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period ends. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the light emitting device emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or in place of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. Alternatively, control may be performed so that all light emitting members or arbitrary light emitting members such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the set value can be changed using any effect device or a notification device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification only needs to be able to notify that the set value can be confirmed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. Note that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

  It is not limited to the form in which the command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command and the 9401H serving as a setting check end command are prepared, and a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is finished when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is finished when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation regarding feature 71AK)
FIG. 14-6 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in a board case that houses the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch that can detect a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initial setting of a predetermined effect output or the like. The production output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volumes of the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the light emission amount of light emitting members, such as the game effect lamp 9, may be included. For example, when a game attendant opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated. Thus, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 3. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, whether to change or change the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like is switched. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such an effect output setting as output setting information in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), the output amount change-over switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the channel is set by rotating the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the player adjusts the volume. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or through a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120, thereby corresponding to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 14-7 illustrates initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R depends on “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit volume is initially set to “97.0”, and the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is controlled (allowed). It should be noted that the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited to the sound volume, and it is sufficient that the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 can be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of “6” to “F”, volume setting (adjustment) by the player is impossible (prohibited). Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the effect display device 5 can display a setting screen such as a power saving function, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), and The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. Based on the detection of the operation of receiving the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output by the knob 71AK002 and switching the switch position. The production output amount can be controlled in any of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 14-8 illustrates an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification regarding the characteristic portion 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), as a setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), a setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C), an initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic section 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In the power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Furthermore, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification is started with the start of the initialization notification period, and the initialization notification is ended with the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be a mode displayed on the screen.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting of effect output such as sound volume as one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the sound output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output with a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 in which the message “setting change is in progress” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 in which a message “Setting confirmation is in progress” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 in which the message “initialized” is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  In this way, an operation related to adjustment of the effect output is detected according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. . Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 may be output with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the storage contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 14-9 illustrates a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” and the player has not yet adjusted the production output, the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”. FIG. 14-9 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is made different according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). . At this time, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2” in response to the operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displays the first The display color memory is increased by one. As described above, each time a first operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction or the like) is detected, a plurality of stages of production are performed until the production output setting reaches a maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that an output amount may be increased one step at a time. On the other hand, every time the second operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the output output amount in a plurality of stages is increased until the setting of the effect output reaches the minimum. What is necessary is just to change so that it may decrease one step at a time.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 14-9 (B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting a power saving function and a display area for setting a value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode) according to the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the attendant of the game hall, etc. And the setting (change) of the value which shows the present date by RTC126 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation for changing each setting. For example, when “power saving mode A” is set to be displayed on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control to activate the power saving function is performed only when the demonstration screen display is in a waiting for a demo. Anything can be done. In addition, when it is set to select “power saving mode B” on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the luminance of the game effect lamp 9 is also displayed during the variable display in addition to during the customer waiting demonstration. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be used.

  FIG. 14-10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 71AK. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012) as in the above embodiment. The initialization process at step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process at step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process at step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process at step AKS012 in the above embodiment. If it is. After executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. Thereafter, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the processing of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71 AKS 017) and the effect random number update process (Step 71 AKS 018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic section 71AK, the in-progress output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 14-11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching process. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). If the switch position is other than “F” (step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and the output at the start time The switching process is terminated. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control for starting setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so that the effect display unit 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function. After the control for setting the power saving function or the like is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting has not been completed (step 71 AKS 035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71 AKS 036), and the process returns to step 71 AKS 035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A or the operation of pressing the push button 31B. Thus, control may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching process is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. In addition, when setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 14-12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the in-progress output change process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be set in advance as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a switch permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on the detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, when the switch position is other than “F” (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as that in Steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the start time output switching process may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. Thereafter, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

  If the switching permission condition is not satisfied at step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), the switch position is not changed at step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or the control is performed at step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After the determination, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the player can set (adjust) the volume (allow). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. In addition, it is not limited to what determines whether switching permission conditions were satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the detection of a switch position by step 71AKS052 may be performed without performing determination by step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the detection of the operation for changing the stage output amount in a plurality of stages is performed based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process is terminated. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the volume setting after the change is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. You can do it.

(Description of modification regarding characteristic portion 71AK)
FIGS. 14-13 shows the priority of control regarding notification or screen display by effect control in the modification of the characteristic portion 71AK. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, when the setting check state is controlled with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, control may be performed so that the game is not stopped. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and in the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is set. You may validate the input of the changeover switch signal which can specify a switch position. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 for setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 for the setting screen for the power saving function and the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the setting change notification priority AKP11, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71 AKP 12 and further the setting confirmation notification priority AKP 13.

  As described above, the setting change notification priority 71AKP11 is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position “F” before the setting change is completed, the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like, when the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position “F” before the setting confirmation is completed, power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when changing the set value, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed, whereas when confirming the set value, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed. . Thus, when the set value changing operation is prevented from being hindered, the stage of the production output amount can be appropriately controlled together with the confirmation of the set value.

  By executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 and executing the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect an operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, it is not limited to a mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, but whether or not an operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected in the command processing at power-on is determined. If it can be determined and the operation is detected, information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information You may do. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the switch position specifying result. Also in this case, when the setting is changed, it is possible to limit the control of the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, when the setting is changed, it is determined whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, for example, whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”. For example, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control for displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command process, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 which has been given priority is also ended. It suffices if the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation that a player performs a predetermined operation is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Also good. For example, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by a player is provided together with or instead of the setting key 121IW051 or the clear switch 121IW050, and the player's operation is detected by the setting value change switch. Based on this, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch 121IW050.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, after the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, the game stop state start process is executed, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. In this case, the input of a changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, so that the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the setting screen 71AKD12 such as the power saving function are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect is detected regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. Execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Thereby, since the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The production control CPU 120 controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect is received by the knob 71AK002. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the initial setting of the production output amount can be appropriately switched. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the effect control main process of the characteristic section 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control for switching the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position is performed at step 71AKS033, or control for setting the power saving function is performed at steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037. Thus, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the initial setting of the production output amount can be appropriately switched. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the setting change notification is made by the display screen of the effect display device 5 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It is output at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when the notification is made with the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is illegal to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 71AK)
As for the above-described feature portion 71AK, there is a conventional gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing the setting related to the production, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2015-29614 do not take into account control when changing the production settings while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes setting change processing) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing) capable of proceeding with the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
A setting control means that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
An effect adjustment detecting means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019) CPU 120 for effect control to be executed)
Limiting means for restricting execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, in step AKS012 as a power-on command process in step 71AKS012) in the change permission state Production control CPU 120 for executing the process),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production according to the progress of the game (for example, CPU 120 for production control);
An effect control board (for example, the effect control board 12) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes accepting means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that accepts an operation that can be detected by the effect adjusting detection means.
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
If the output adjustment control means detects an operation by the effect adjustment detection means before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means performs an operation by the effect adjustment detection means after the change permission state ends. To the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike the operation during the game by the player, it is provided with an initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch 121IW050) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
When in the change-permitted state, the setting value by the setting unit can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting unit (for example, when the clear switch 121IW050 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 121IW052) ),
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting value without separately providing a configuration for changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Change notification means (for example, the effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying the setting value change by the setting means,
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of setting change notification sound 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered while preventing the setting value from being changed due to fraud.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The output amount control means includes
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of the operation by the production adjustment detection means (for example, the setting screen of the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13). Priority 71AKP12),
When it is in the change permission state, it does not control the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of the operation by the production adjustment detecting means (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc. 71AKP11),
Any one of the means 1 to means 5 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the production can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, while the stage of the output amount of the production is not controlled when the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring.

(Explanation regarding feature 72AK)
FIG. 14-14 shows an execution example of the operation at power-on by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops with the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After moving upward from the retreat position to the right and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the operation effect is returned to the retreat position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotation mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time with the combined closed state as the origin position. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thereby, after the 1st movable member advances to the display screen center part of the production | presentation display apparatus 5, it will be in the open state which the 1st-3rd division piece will divide | segment by the motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the first moveable member being at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the origin position. It only needs to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops with the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect is returned to return to the retracted position again. The second movable member is lowered from the retracted position, which is the origin position, by the operation motor AK014 to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation that simply reciprocates up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between a closed state and an open state of the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left position or the right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that allows the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during the execution of an effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a malfunction occurs in the normal performance operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the normal production operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

  When a long initial operation is performed as a power-on operation, first, as indicated by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. To the overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 that is the advance position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken-line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state of the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the sliding mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. After returning to the home position. Then, as indicated by a solid arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the origin position (retracted position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control for executing the operations indicated by broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operations indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are necessary. Further, in the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member are performed so that the movement amount is larger than the movement indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the movement indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection results by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, an operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state that is the origin position is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on. After that, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member is moved as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 14-15 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used for executing a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production executed as the game progresses, such as reach production, for example. The effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second effect different from the first effect such as a notice effect, for example, which is executed as the game progresses. . In addition, as a control pattern of a movable member, more control patterns may be prepared and a part of control pattern may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive content of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121 and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 14-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at the time of power-on of the characteristic portion 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a reception command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005) to change the setting, as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It should be noted that, even in the period after step 72AKS008 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is finished (step 72AKS008) as in the above-described embodiment. If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and a standby is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), the control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation that is the return operation when the setting change state is the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. When the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is executed, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the long initial which becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation which becomes the return operation Control to execute the operation can be performed. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting | reporting is performed (step 72AKS014). In addition, after performing control which performs initialization alerting | reporting, you may make it perform control which performs long initial operation | movement. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control for executing initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting check start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015) and the setting check is performed as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 72AKS017). Control for executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the control in step 72AKS017 is executed and in a setting check state for checking the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. It should be noted that, even in the period after step 72AKS018 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting check is to be ended as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). When the setting confirmation is not finished (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), the control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command process is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation follows the short initial operation that becomes the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform the control for executing. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. When the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023 is executed, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of the power supply, the long initial which becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation which becomes the return operation Control to execute the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in Step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modifications regarding Feature 72AK)
FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed in the modification of the feature unit 72AK. In the power-on command process in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), and then control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, and control for executing initialization notification is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply upon power-on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control of executing the long initial operation as the initial operation can be performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. . In addition, even after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then a short circuit that becomes a return operation. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. Then, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command process in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), and then control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the memory content at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply upon power-on. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation can be performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. it can. In addition, after executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS020, the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034. After the state is finished, it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery notification command and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the common control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. Then, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be performed in accordance with the initialization notification, or may be performed even if the initialization notification is not performed. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be performed in accordance with the power failure recovery notification, or may be performed without the power failure recovery notification. Further, after the start of the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the return operation condition is satisfied. After starting the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the initial operation condition is satisfied.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. It is only necessary to be able to operate according to a predetermined operation mode in the production accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command process for the feature 72AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state permitting the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the movable member. Can be prevented from occurring. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the feature section 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is performed as a return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished. If a long initial operation that is an initial operation is executed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when in the setting confirmation state. Thus, in the setting change state as the change permission state, the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, and the setting value changing operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent troubles in changing the value. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control for executing the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS011. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation as the initial operation. As a result, when the trouble of changing the set value is prevented, it is possible to prevent a useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control burden for operating the movable member. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the feature 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control is performed in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032, thereby returning to the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to perform control for executing initialization notification. In this way, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, so that when initialization related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, an initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the operation of the movable member can be made common to reduce the control burden for operating the movable member. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command process for the feature 72AK, in step AKS017, a control to execute a short initial operation is performed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Thereafter, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, in step 72AKS021, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting confirmation state is completed, control is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state. Like that. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 72AK)
As for the above-described feature portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player has been disclosed in, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 have not taken into consideration the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes setting change processing) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing) capable of proceeding with the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
A setting control means that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
A movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. A production control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012, and the like.
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012, 72AKS013, etc.)
When in the change-permitted state, control to execute the initial operation is not performed following the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being performed when the change is permitted.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless operation by the movable member and to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means includes
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 associated with execution of step 72AKS014).
After completion of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by making the operation of the movable member common, and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
Setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The movable control means includes
When in the setting confirmation state, control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After completion of the setting confirmation state, control to execute the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the feature 73AK)
FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. Also in the feature portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the command process at power-on of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) to change the setting as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73 AKS 006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73 AKS 007). If the setting change is not finished (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), the control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, control is not performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is the change permission state. .

  When it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end process is executed in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. Is performed (step 73AKS010), and then, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. When the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply. Can be controlled. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, it is possible to perform a control to execute a short initial operation that becomes a return operation after the setting change state ends. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is finished, the long initial that becomes the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control to execute the operation can be performed.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting is performed (Step 73AKS012). In addition, after performing control which performs initialization alerting | reporting, you may be made to perform control which performs short initial operation or long initial operation. Or after performing control which performs short initial operation, control which performs initialization alerting may be performed, and control which performs long initial operation may be performed after that.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is a setting check start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013) and the setting check is performed as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, a control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). Control in which the control in step 73AKS015 is executed to perform a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting check state for checking the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 73AKS016 and subsequent steps, the control in step 73AKS015 is continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to confirm the setting (step 73AKS016). If the setting check is not finished (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be terminated (step 73AKS016; Yes), the control for terminating the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing is terminated. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, a long initial operation, which is an initial operation of the movable member, is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation that becomes the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform the control for executing. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. When the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021 is executed, the long initial which becomes the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which becomes the return operation when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply. Control to execute the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK.

  FIG. 14-19 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the feature portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message “setting confirmation in progress” is displayed, and a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of set values may be stored cumulatively on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in a predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122, so that the effect control board 12 May be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in the backup area in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 together with the RTC information, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted. In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a set value history from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the power supply is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. You may make it possible to specify with the start of.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the setting value history is grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that it is movable when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, a short initial operation that is a return operation is executed. A history of set values that can be displayed in 73 AKD01 can be easily grasped by an attendant at a game hall. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, while the long initial that is the initial operation is executed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable member from easily grasping the setting value history.

  Even when the setting is changed to the setting change state, a history of setting values may be displayed. In this case, it is only necessary to perform control to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting change state as the change permission state. Thus, when the setting value history can be displayed by controlling to the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, a short initial operation that is a return operation is performed, and the setting value is set. It may be possible to easily grasp the history.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, in step 73AKS010, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command, the control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation that is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Thus, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be finished, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to perform a control to execute a short initial operation as a return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. An operation for appropriately returning the member to the origin position becomes possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that a short initial operation that becomes a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform control for executing initialization notification. In this way, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, so that when initialization related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, an initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation that is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the operation of the movable member can be made common to reduce the control burden for operating the movable member. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control is performed to execute a short initial operation in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the setting value history, is being executed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. A command 9100H that is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from a command 9000H that is a RAM clear notification command, a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command, and a command 9400H that is a setting check start command. Thus, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted when the setting value change in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted to be changed in accordance with the start of power supply upon power-on. Is done. Thereby, when preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation from occurring, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the effect. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 73AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 have not taken into consideration the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 73AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes setting change processing) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing) capable of proceeding with the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
A setting control means that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
And at least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation control for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, when the change is permitted, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK characterized by the above may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for performing initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.)
The movable control means includes
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by making the operation of the movable member common, and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, the effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The setting display means can display a history of setting values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and the setting value changing operation is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature 73AK,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the information from the game control means (for example, the production control CPU 120 for executing the command analysis process of AKS015).
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) that is different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled. ,
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the effect control means and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(Explanation regarding the feature 74AK)
14-20 has shown the structural example of the production | presentation control pattern 74AKP01 used in order to perform a confirmation production | presentation regarding the characteristic part 74AK of a present Example. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic portion 74AK includes a confirmation sound output that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, a confirmation sound output that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. And confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation lever (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00. For example, an initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation. First confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound from the right speaker 8R twice. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibration in which two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A are driven in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination value are performed. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, output of confirmation sound and confirmation vibration can be executed.

  Further, during execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, lighting of the light emitting member is started and output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound is started from the right speaker 8R. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is completed, confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is finished, and the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect is finished. The confirmation effect satisfies the confirmation effect condition by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period after power supply is started by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The execution is started. Any one of the confirmation sound output from the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output from the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when any one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so that the other effects are not executed. In this way, by confirming sound output and confirmation vibration being executed at different timings, it is easy for a game attendant or the like to know whether or not an effect using each effect device can be executed normally. Can do.

  FIG. 14-21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 74AK. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number update process (Step 74AKS017) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first performed, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and it may be determined that the initialization notification is started when the initialization notification start flag is on.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with the passage of a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is a confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or if it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period is in step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not variable display is started (step 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display is started by receiving the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period with the start of variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, the timer value is determined to be determined by the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is made, control for terminating the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the elapsed time measurement by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). And when it determines with it being the start of variable display (step 74AKS041; Yes), control which stops a confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and a confirmation effect control process is complete | finished. In this way, when variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for terminating the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 14-23 is a timing chart showing an example of confirmation effect control for the feature portion 74AK. In FIG. 14-23 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050 is detected, while the operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 to ON is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 14-23 (B), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is a detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050 and a detection of an operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 on. The case where it is controlled to the setting change state is shown. FIG. 14-23 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command has been received at the timing 74 </ b> AKT <b> 02 when the setting change state is not controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74 </ b> AKT <b> 01. . In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control in step AKS030 is performed, and initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of feature 74AK, it is determined that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. The If an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. Steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 are started to execute the confirmation effect. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this way, the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 are used to provide a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects. Staging is executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the confirmation effect is ended by performing the control in step 74AKS045.

  On the other hand, in the case where the setting change state is controlled in accordance with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, for example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the command processing at power-on in the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. And the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for the case where the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, and thus following steps AKS028 and AKS029. In step AKS030, initialization notification is started.

  Thus, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031 in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature portion 74AK. The confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. Steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 are started to execute the confirmation effect. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this way, the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 are used to provide a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects. Staging is executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the confirmation effect ends by performing the control in step 74AKS045.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. It may be possible to execute.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 74AKS012, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, the game stop state start process is executed, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control for executing initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps. Perform control to be executed. Thus, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, since the control for changing the setting value is prioritized over the control for executing the confirmation effect, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command process, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Thereafter, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Do. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the feature part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that a confirmation acceptance period is reached. . As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state by executing the control in step 74AKS032. ), The confirmation confirmation period is the same as when the setting confirmation state is completed. Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, when preventing trouble in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share control for execution of the confirmation effect, and to reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the feature part 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling the control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes output of confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as sound output means. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 74AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 74AK, there is a conventional gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect conflict. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes setting change processing) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing) capable of proceeding with the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
A setting control means that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of performing production (eg, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
Confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018) capable of executing confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started; With
The confirmation control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021 and AKS030) ),
When in the change permission state, control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030) ),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
Provided with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the confirmation effect condition in the common confirmation reception period when the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
Any one of the means 1 to the means 3 related to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect can be made common to prevent troubles in changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
Provided with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of confirmation sound by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 75AK)
14-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature 74AK of the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the characteristic portion 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005) to change the setting, as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not finished (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is executed (step 75AKS008), and the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command process of the characteristic portion 75AK, the setting change confirmation state control process is executed in step 75AKS008, whereby the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply. Control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), the control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  When it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end process is executed in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), Power-on command processing is terminated. As described above, in the power-on command process of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is not executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the confirmation effect can be executed when in the setting change state, while control for enabling the confirmation effect is not performed when in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 14-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control processing during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect changing confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 75AKS033). If no operation is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer initial stage is set. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, the determination of step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, an arbitrary period such as a confirmation reception period is not provided. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for terminating the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that a timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is met (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 14-26 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of confirmation effect control for the feature 75AK. In FIG. 14-26A, when power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050 is detected, while the operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 to ON is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 14-26B, when power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch 121IW050 is detected, and the operation of switching the setting key 121IW051 to ON is detected. The case where it is controlled to the setting change state is shown. FIG. 14-26 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  When the power supply is started by turning on the power at timing 75AKT01, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is the same as the case where the feature 74AK does not control the setting change state, and the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation reception period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. A plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power supply is started by turning on the power at timing 75AKT11, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is changed to the setting change state in the feature 74AK. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. Thereby, following step 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether setting change is complete | finished in step 75AKS007, but when not complete | finishing at this time, the confirmation effect control process during setting change is performed in step 75AKS008. The In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, if it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined whether or not a start operation is detected in step 75AKS033. Thus, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the setting change state as the change permission state. For example, when an operation of depressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, control for executing the confirmation effect is started, such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at timing 75AKT15 after timing 75AKT14 is reached, it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is completed in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. That's fine. And when the start operation | movement of a confirmation effect is detected in this confirmation reception period, the control which performs a confirmation effect should just be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command process of the feature 75AK includes the setting effect confirmation effect control process during setting change executed at step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected at step 75AKS033 of the effect effect control process during setting change. If it is determined that there is a confirmation effect, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power is turned on, when the control is changed to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Therefore, by making it possible to execute a confirmation effect when it is in the setting change state as the change permission state, it is possible to confirm the state of the gaming machine accurately and to hinder the work of checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the command process at power-on of the feature portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the feature portion 74AK is executed, thereby confirming acceptance. The period starts. In the confirmation acceptance period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected without providing a confirmation reception period. As a result, a confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting change state as the change permission condition is satisfied. It can be done properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Then, the confirmation reception period is started by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature portion 74AK. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period, thereby causing trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine. When this is prevented, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected. In addition, when the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature portion 74AK is executed, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Thereby, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed in the case of preventing troubles in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic part 75AK)
With respect to the above characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player has been disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect conflict. For this reason, there is a possibility that the work for checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing troubles in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes setting change processing) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing) capable of proceeding with the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
A setting control means that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of performing production (eg, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
Confirmation control means (for example, confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018, confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started. Production control CPU 120 for executing the process),
The confirmation control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.) ),
When in the change-permitted state, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent troubles in checking the state of the gaming machine. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means includes
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). 74AKS036 execution, etc.)
When in the change-permitted state, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after executing Steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018 execution, etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble from occurring in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
Provided with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is established based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble from occurring in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Explanation of means common to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of means A relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a setting key 121IW051) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch 121IW050) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
A setting confirmation control means that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control means that can be controlled to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means with the start of power supply,
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the setting value can be appropriately set by appropriately controlling the setting confirmation state and the change permission state.

As a gaming machine of means B according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a setting key 121IW051) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch 121IW050) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When an operation is not detected by the setting detection unit with the start of power supply and an operation is detected by the initialization detection unit, an initialization notification is executed together with the start of power supply, while power supply start Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection means, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification after the operation is not detected (for example, for effect control for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) CPU 120 etc.)
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by appropriately executing the initialization notification.

As a gaming machine of means C relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Comprising information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information relating to a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a gaming machine of means D according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
An effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the effect;
Display control means for displaying the display related to the set value by the setting means in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing step AKS026);
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of means E according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the command analysis process of AKS015),
The effect control means is information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when the change permission state is in effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing AKS027, etc. )
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Other configurations)
As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the above-described characteristic portion. However, in addition to or instead of this characteristic portion, the gaming machine 1 may include the following configuration.

(Game machine frame / door open sensor and information output circuit)
Various substrates (not shown) such as a payout control board and an information terminal board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are provided outlets for discharging the game balls that have won the prize winning holes and the game balls that have entered the out outlets, and in the outlets, there are pachinko gaming machines. A discharge port switch 21TM070 (not shown) is provided for detecting game balls discharged from the inside. The payout control board includes a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a door that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front of the gaming board 2 so as to be openable and closable. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 (not shown) including a frame opening sensor is connected, and occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) is determined based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has functions. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the micro of the payout control board. The computer can distinguish and recognize the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal is mounted on the information terminal board. Note that the information output circuit 112 may be mounted on the main board 11.

(Setting change signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output circuit 112 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 15A, the information output circuit 112 according to the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and a signal corresponding to each information output terminal is output. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The award ball signal is a pulse-like signal that is output every time 10 award balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when

  From the third terminal, a total symbol determination number signal is output. The total symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when displayed (when confirmed), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. All starting port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start opening signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball wins at the first start winning opening, and is also output when a game ball win at the second start winning opening occurs. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  One signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is also in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. In other words, the period in which the big hit 1 signal is in the OFF state and the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output every time ten out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. Each time the game ball wins a prize signal (corresponding to each prize opening), each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) This is a pulse-like signal that is output every time a winning is detected by the switch, and is output every time ten winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is ON for 30 seconds when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning occurs is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, a game control timer interruption process is performed ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc., it is determined that the switch is abnormally detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  In this way, a security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and a setting change response signal can be output from the 7th terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (a process related to the setting change has been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. After the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode is ended.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (2), when the setting check mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change response signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as in the example shown in FIG. Even after is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  If the RAM is cleared without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn ON.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change response signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is completed. However, the security signal is set to the parity in the setting change mode (or the setting check mode based on the RAM clear being executed). Even if the check result is not normal, the state remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time of power-on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period has reached 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal can be recognized by the apparatus and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting confirmation mode may be temporarily controlled. When the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear is executed and the possibility that the RAM is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, a security signal is output during a period controlled in the setting change mode, while a security signal is not output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration in which a security signal is not output and a security signal is not output even during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change response signal is turned off as the setting check mode ends, the security signal is kept off based on the fact that RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (5), the RAM clear is executed after the control in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power-on. If this happens, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (setting change response signal is turned off).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled in the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but a security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is kept in the off state. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change response signal is turned off). When one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. It becomes a relationship. With this relationship, signal output control is simplified (output control is simplified because both signals are not in the ON state at the same time), and the control period for setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (6), when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There are cases where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a setting change compatible signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 15-1 (2) shows an example in which a setting change response signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, the high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is ON for 30 seconds when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning occurs is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, a game control timer interruption process is performed ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc., it is determined that the switch is abnormally detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 15-1 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change response signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, by being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside that the fraudulent act has been performed, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without being notified, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a process related to the setting change may have been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is once turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal is in the OFF state), and then, from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change response signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the gaming machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. And the setting value determined in advance are displayed in association with each other, thereby enabling processing to be displayed in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the game store administrator via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change operation The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. And when such inconsistency arises, the management regarding the setting in a plurality of gaming machines in a gaming store can be optimized by confirming the setting of the gaming machine or performing a setting change operation again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15C, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 second interval). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 15-4 (1), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF. However, based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the special mode setting change corresponding signal As a result, 1 pulse is output.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and at the end of the setting change mode (when the set value is changed) (Setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from a common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a special mode setting change response signal not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, but also at a predetermined predetermined event. The Specifically, events related to the gaming state such as being controlled to the big hit gaming state, having finished the big hit gaming state, having finished the high base state, having increased the number of paid-out balls 1000 Or an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of opening of the glass door frame 3a, detection of magnetic abnormality, etc. A setting change correspondence signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of occurrence). In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (1), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As a result, it becomes possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine in the external device. For example, when the setting change response signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the set value at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and it is possible to enhance prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (2), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF, and the setting change response is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has become 3. Three pulses are output as signals. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (2), 3 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (1), when the setting value is not changed because the operation for changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch) is not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode. And, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (2), when the setting value is changed by performing an operation (setting switch switch operation) for changing the setting value while being controlled in the setting change mode. In any case, after the end of the setting change mode, the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed upon completion of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. The signal output process can be simplified.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (3), the setting change response signal is turned on when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1 and remains unchanged. In this case, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change response signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. As a result, 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (3), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change response signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (setting value storage in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on) The setting value stored in the area and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029) can be notified to the outside, and the signal indicating whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 15-1 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the OFF state is entered, and then, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode) ) Setting change response signal is output.

(Power-on processing)
FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and corresponds to the game control main processing. However, some of the processes described above are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). Specifically, a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 checks whether the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process shifts to a setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the setting key 121IW051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a normal value, for example, any one of 1 to 3. (Step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Further, when the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not clear switch 121IW050 is in an ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 121IW029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM3045), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. . Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the microcomputer of the payout control board. When the microcomputer on the payout control board recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  A detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that the game control is performed (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it is confirmed whether the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . If the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM3060) and the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070) and / or It becomes possible to confirm and the game machine frame 3 is in a closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the setting key 121IW051 is in an OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), and the process proceeds to normal game processing. .

  In this embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to enter a state in which the set value can be confirmed (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, 2) The two conditions that the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can check the set value (setting check Mode). In addition to the conditions of (1) and (2), (3) on the condition that the clear switch 121IW050 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040, as will be described later. It is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the setting value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the setting key 121IW051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or some illegal The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode Any of these may be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in a closed state, the process proceeds to normal game processing. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the routine proceeds to normal game processing. With the shift to the normal game process, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process or the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if regular values (1 to 3) are stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular values (1 to 3) are not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), A set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Temporarily, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the normal value (1 to 3) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the set value, and a set value abnormal error command is transmitted.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “setting value is abnormal”). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value is to be changed (for example, displays a message “Please change the setting value”). Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal (for example, output a sound “the set value is abnormal”), and change the set value. It is also possible to notify that the state should be changed (for example, output a voice “Please change the setting value”).

  When transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 confirms whether clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared to the initial value. Is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029) such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 121IW029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Migrate to The backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The command transmission flag may be cleared when the normal game process is started (step S21TM1470 ~). Only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, If the determination is YES in step S21TM3020) and the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before shifting to the normal game process, it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM is cleared to clear the area including the set value storage area (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to enter a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the setting key 121IW051 is in an ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once and the next power-on (1) to (3) All the conditions are satisfied, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a normal value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may make it do. The presentation control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, “let the power off”) prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 16B, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the setting key 121IW051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change response signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 121IW029 (step S21TM3550).

  Furthermore, CPU103 confirms whether a RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is being executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch 121IW050 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  If clear switch 121IW050 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When clear switch 121IW050 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 updates the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520.

  Here, it is possible to execute the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current set value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580), but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM3600) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag remains 0. To be controlled on the basis of

  In addition, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and the RAM clear flag is 1). To be controlled based on that).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If setting key 121IW051 is OFF in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the subsequent processing of step S21TM3020, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value stored in the setting value storage area to CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3720). As described above, the production control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step S21TM3730) and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and the power is cut off during the setting change. If it is determined that the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030) and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the RAM Since clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed, it is only necessary to execute normal processing when the power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (step S21TM3060). NO) is confirmed In the case, it may be shifted to the normal game process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), this means that the RAM clear has been executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the setting key 121IW051 is temporarily turned off. If the regular set values (1 to 3) are not stored in the set value storage area before (YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0) For example, when an operation for changing the setting value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the normal setting values (1 to 3) in the setting value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the setting key 121IW051 and turning on the clear switch 121IW050 when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to initialize the gaming state or the like (execute RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the setting key 121IW051 and turning off the clear switch 121IW050 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode and the gaming state and the like are not initialized ( It is possible to determine NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and not execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In this way, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  In the control shown in FIG. 16B, the setting key 121IW051 is not turned off in the state where the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and If all of the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for being opened. At this time, the gaming control microcomputer 100 operates the setting key 121IW051 to instruct that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the setting key 121IW051, and confirms the setting change mode. A command for instructing that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Upon receiving these commands, the effect control CPU 120 informs that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened through the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and sets the setting key 121IW051. It is notified that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended by operating. For example, a message “Open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the setting key 121IW051 to end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In addition, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the routine game processing is started, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the setting key 121IW051 Is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the clear switch 121IW050 is In response to the operation (from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the clear switch 121IW050 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  FIG. 16C is an explanatory diagram of a change in the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. When the setting change mode is controlled, in step S21TM3550, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed. At this time, if a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (1), the 7-segment display of the display monitor 121IW029 Displays the letter “E”. Therefore, the store clerk of the game hall grasps that at least a regular value is not stored in the set value storage area, and operates the clear switch 121IW050 (performs a setting change operation).

  Every time the store clerk operates the clear switch 121IW050 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 in accordance with the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information (alphabet E in this example) different from the number is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 as information corresponding thereto. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, the game hall manager May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may cause the setting key 121IW051 to be turned off without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. Thus, such misunderstanding is prevented, and the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. On the 7-segment display of the display monitor 121IW029, the letter “E” is displayed. After that, when a setting change operation is performed even once and a regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the setting key 121IW051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value. No value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (the letter E in this example). ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 is executed. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 In this order, the information displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value at the beginning, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed after that, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the setting key 121IW051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value, and the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the regular value is not displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, at the game hall side, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the setting value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, a game can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. become unable. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. If the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not terminated, the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Display on display monitor when normal and abnormal)
As shown in FIG. 16-3 (3), when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value (in an abnormal state), as the information corresponding to this, the four digits of the display monitor 121IW029 In all of the displays, information (alphabet E in this example) different from the numbers is displayed. On the other hand, when the value stored in the set value storage area is a regular value (normal), the first display of the 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029 is displayed as information corresponding thereto. The set value (2 in this example) is displayed.

  In other words, when the value stored in the set value storage area is abnormal, it is displayed in a more explicit manner than when it is normal, so it is possible to more clearly notify that the set value is abnormal. it can. Note that the display mode when the value stored in the set value storage area is abnormal (abnormal) and normal (normal) is not limited to this. For example, when the value is normal, The display value may be displayed in a different display color, or the set value may be displayed in all of the four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029 even during normal operation.

(Output period of security signal and setting change response signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. With this security signal, as described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraud detection, game stop target error, and the like have been performed. In addition, the security signal is processed from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 16-1 and FIG. It is turned ON during a period from Step S21TM3510 shown in 16-2 to Step S21TM3060 or until it is determined NO in Step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 15-1 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change correspondence signal is transmitted from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 16-1 and 16). It is turned ON during a period from Step S21TM3510 shown in 16-2 to Step S21TM3060 or until it is determined NO in Step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed. By this setting change response signal, it is possible to notify the outside that processing related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been executed (processing related to setting value change or confirmation has been executed). Also, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when transitioning to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and thereafter, from the same seventh terminal, Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (1), when the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 16-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode is ended and the normal game process is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting change mode was ended and the routine game process was completed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 16-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 16-5 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started, 50 ms elapses). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 16-5 (3). In this case, after the setting change mode ends, the OFF state is not immediately turned on, and the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing).

  In either case of FIGS. 16-5 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to be precise, the setting change is performed). The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after that (for example, after 50 ms or more elapses) after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started and then 50 ms elapses). Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not changed to the setting change mode, the security signal is displayed when the power is turned on (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after clearing.

  Therefore, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed on the external device side to which the security signal is input, but the setting change mode is not entered. Can be recognized. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode with RAM clear). If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not be executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. (There is a possibility that only the confirmation may have been made without being able to change the set value).

  That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but there is a possibility that the setting change mode may not be entered. If the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. (If there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value), and the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds , There is a possibility that it has shifted to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch 121IW050 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so that the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). As a result, the security signal output period is about the period controlled by the setting change mode + 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 121IW050 is OFF and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), so the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the security signal output period is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  Thus, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the output period of the security signal is different, so that each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (more precisely, the setting change mode Alternatively, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting confirmation mode is finished and the normal game process is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change support signal. In addition, when the security signal input period is longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear is executed accordingly. In the case where the input period of the setting change support signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting check mode without the RAM clear is controlled.

  In this way, when the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from different output terminals, a predetermined event (in this example, RAM clear) occurs in the gaming machine on the external device side to which these signals are input. It can be specified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the game machine and the gaming machine being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it can be specified based on the input period of the security signal whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Next, based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 121IW050 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Since the setting key 121IW051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process Suppose that

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal at the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even when the setting check mode is finished (the setting key 121IW051 is turned off) and the normal game process is started after the setting check mode is started, the period is at least 50 ms, The setting change response signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, regarding the setting change response signal and the security signal, once turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period during which the setting change response signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned on at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON. When the number of 100 ms-wide pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output after that, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneously recognized. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, at least a predetermined period (in this example, 50 ms), by turning on the setting change correspondence signal, the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

(Explanation for associating feature parts)
Note that the configuration indicated by the feature portions 1560S and 121IW can be combined with the configuration indicated by other feature portions such as the feature portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the pre-read zone effect, the reach suggestion effect during the reach, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect shown in the feature section 121IW, Medium suggestion production, production by change of production stage, pre-game suggestion production, game suggestion production, big hit suggestion production, when a predetermined period has elapsed, pre-read zone production and reach suggestion in the same manner as the feature 31AK You may be configured to be able to notify the title corresponding to the effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit. Further, for example, when the pre-read zone effect, the suggestion effect during reach, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect shown in the characteristic part 121IW are executed, the pre-read zone effect or reach The suggestion history display can be executed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 1560S when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect during the stage, the effect due to the change of the effect stage, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit You may comprise.

  Similarly, each configuration related to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other characteristic portions. About the characteristic part combined in this way, or the individual characteristic part which is not combined, you may combine suitably a part or all of each structure regarding another characteristic part. For example, with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at start time in step 71AKS013 of the production control main processing, and the short initial operation at step 72AK007 of the power-on command processing with respect to the characteristic portion 72AK. With regard to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed and the characteristic portion 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is finished. With regard to the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, in step 74AKS008 of the power-on command process regarding the configuration and the characteristic portion 75AK of the CPU 120 for effect control that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process. Configuration of the effect control CPU120 for executing a constant change in confirmation effect control process, some or all, or may be appropriately combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM for game control
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect.